Return error status from bfd_elf_discard_info.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
4b95cf5c 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
1db37fe6 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
1db37fe6 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a
DJ
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
710
252b5132
RH
711@ifset UsesEnvVars
712The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 713@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
714some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
715@end ifset
716
717The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
718@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
719at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
720
721@cindex emulation
722@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 723@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
724Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
725emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
726
727If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
728@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
729
730Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
731configured.
732
733@cindex link map
734@kindex -M
735@kindex --print-map
736@item -M
737@itemx --print-map
738Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
739information about the link, including the following:
740
741@itemize @bullet
742@item
3b83e13a 743Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
744@item
745How common symbols are allocated.
746@item
747All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
748which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
749@item
750The values assigned to symbols.
751
752Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
753involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
754have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
755linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
756of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
757the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
758linker script containing:
759
760@smallexample
761 foo = 1
762 foo = foo * 4
763 foo = foo + 8
764@end smallexample
765
766will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
767option is used:
768
769@smallexample
770 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
773@end smallexample
774
775See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
776scripts.
252b5132
RH
777@end itemize
778
779@kindex -n
780@cindex read-only text
781@cindex NMAGIC
782@kindex --nmagic
783@item -n
784@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
785Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
786libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
787mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
788
789@kindex -N
790@kindex --omagic
791@cindex read/write from cmd line
792@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 793@item -N
252b5132
RH
794@itemx --omagic
795Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
796not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
797libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
798mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
799is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
800specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
801
802@kindex --no-omagic
803@cindex OMAGIC
804@item --no-omagic
805This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
806sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
807be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
808shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
809
810@kindex -o @var{output}
811@kindex --output=@var{output}
812@cindex naming the output file
813@item -o @var{output}
814@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 815Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
816option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
817script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
818
819@kindex -O @var{level}
820@cindex generating optimized output
821@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 822If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 823the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
824should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
825option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
826the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
827no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
828of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 829
26278bb8
UD
830@kindex --push-state
831@cindex push state governing input file handling
832@item --push-state
833The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
834flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
835restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
836
837The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
838@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
839@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
840@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
841@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
842@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
843
844One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
845used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
846listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
847something as follows:
848
849@smallexample
850-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
851@end smallexample
852
853@kindex --pop-state
854@cindex pop state governing input file handling
855Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
856flags governing input file handling.
857
a712da20
NC
858@kindex -q
859@kindex --emit-relocs
860@cindex retain relocations in final executable
861@item -q
862@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 863Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
864Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
865order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
866in larger executables.
867
dbab7a7b
NC
868This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
869
4f471f39
RS
870@kindex --force-dynamic
871@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
872@item --force-dynamic
873Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
874to VxWorks targets.
875
252b5132
RH
876@cindex partial link
877@cindex relocatable output
878@kindex -r
1049f94e 879@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 880@item -r
1049f94e 881@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 882Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 883turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
884linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
885magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
886@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 887@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
888If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
889linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
890constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
891
62bf86b4
HPN
892When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
893partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
894relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
895example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
896with input files in other formats at all.
897
252b5132
RH
898This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
899
900@kindex -R @var{file}
901@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
902@cindex symbol-only input
903@item -R @var{filename}
904@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
905Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
906relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
907to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
908programs. You may use this option more than once.
909
ff5dcc92 910For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 911followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 912the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
913
914@kindex -s
915@kindex --strip-all
916@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 917@item -s
252b5132
RH
918@itemx --strip-all
919Omit all symbol information from the output file.
920
921@kindex -S
922@kindex --strip-debug
923@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 924@item -S
252b5132
RH
925@itemx --strip-debug
926Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
927
928@kindex -t
929@kindex --trace
930@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 931@item -t
252b5132 932@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 933Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
934
935@kindex -T @var{script}
936@kindex --script=@var{script}
937@cindex script files
938@item -T @var{scriptfile}
939@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
940Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 941@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 942@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
943output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
944the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
945specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
946options accumulate.
252b5132 947
14be8564
L
948@kindex -dT @var{script}
949@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
950@cindex script files
951@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
952@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
953Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
954
955This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
956processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
957command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
958@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
959behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
960command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
961the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
962@samp{gcc}).
963
252b5132
RH
964@kindex -u @var{symbol}
965@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
966@cindex undefined symbol
967@item -u @var{symbol}
968@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
969Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
970symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
971modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
972different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
973option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
974
975@kindex -Ur
976@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 977@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
978For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
979@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 980turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
981@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
982It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
983with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
984be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
985@samp{-r} for the others.
986
577a0623
AM
987@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
988@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
990@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
991missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
992specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
993multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
994input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
995in a linker script.
a854a4a7 996
252b5132
RH
997@kindex -v
998@kindex -V
999@kindex --version
1000@cindex version
1001@item -v
1002@itemx --version
1003@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1004Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1005lists the supported emulations.
1006
1007@kindex -x
1008@kindex --discard-all
1009@cindex deleting local symbols
1010@item -x
1011@itemx --discard-all
1012Delete all local symbols.
1013
1014@kindex -X
1015@kindex --discard-locals
1016@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1017@item -X
252b5132 1018@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1019Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1020system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1021or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1022
1023@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1024@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1025@cindex symbol tracing
1026@item -y @var{symbol}
1027@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1028Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1029option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1030to prepend an underscore.
1031
1032This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1033don't know where the reference is coming from.
1034
1035@kindex -Y @var{path}
1036@item -Y @var{path}
1037Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1038for Solaris compatibility.
1039
1040@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1041@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1042The recognized keywords are:
1043@table @samp
1044
1045@item combreloc
1046Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1047lookup caching possible.
1048
1049@item defs
560e09e9 1050Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1051shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1052
6aa29e7b
JJ
1053@item execstack
1054Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1055
b039ef04
L
1056@item global
1057This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1058the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1059of subsequently loaded libraries.
1060
cd6d6c15
NC
1061@item initfirst
1062This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1063It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1064before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1065the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1066the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1067objects.
1068
1069@item interpose
1070Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1071but the primary executable.
1072
5fa222e4
AM
1073@item lazy
1074When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1075dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1076the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1077Lazy binding is the default.
1078
cd6d6c15
NC
1079@item loadfltr
1080Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1081runtime.
1082
1083@item muldefs
1084Allows multiple definitions.
1085
1086@item nocombreloc
1087Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1088
1089@item nocopyreloc
1090Disables production of copy relocs.
1091
1092@item nodefaultlib
1093Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1094ignore any default library search paths.
1095
1096@item nodelete
1097Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1098
1099@item nodlopen
1100Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1101
1102@item nodump
1103Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1104
6aa29e7b
JJ
1105@item noexecstack
1106Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1107
1108@item norelro
1109Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1110
cd6d6c15
NC
1111@item now
1112When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1113dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1114when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1115deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1116first called.
1117
1118@item origin
1119Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1120
6aa29e7b
JJ
1121@item relro
1122Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1123
24718e3b
L
1124@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1125Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1126
1127@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1128Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1129
04c3a755
NS
1130@item stack-size=@var{value}
1131Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1132Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1133@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1134
cd6d6c15
NC
1135@end table
1136
ece2d90e 1137Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1138
1139@kindex -(
1140@cindex groups of archives
1141@item -( @var{archives} -)
1142@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1143The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1144either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1145
1146The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1147references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1148the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1149archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1150object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1151would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1152they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1153resolved.
1154
1155Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1156it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1157more archives.
1158
69da35b5
NC
1159@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1160@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1161@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1162@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1163Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1164recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1165and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1166the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1167behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1168so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1169restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1170
4a43e768
AM
1171@kindex --as-needed
1172@kindex --no-as-needed
1173@item --as-needed
1174@itemx --no-as-needed
1175This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1176on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1177the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1178on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1179needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1180emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1181non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1182the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1183non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1184Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1185the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1186needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1187from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1188
e56f61be
L
1189@kindex --add-needed
1190@kindex --no-add-needed
1191@item --add-needed
1192@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1193These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1194their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1195options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1196and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1197
252b5132
RH
1198@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1199@item -assert @var{keyword}
1200This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1201
1202@kindex -Bdynamic
1203@kindex -dy
1204@kindex -call_shared
1205@item -Bdynamic
1206@itemx -dy
1207@itemx -call_shared
1208Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1209for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1210default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1211for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1212multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1213@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1214
a1ab1d2a
UD
1215@kindex -Bgroup
1216@item -Bgroup
1217Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1218section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1219object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1220@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1221only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1222
252b5132
RH
1223@kindex -Bstatic
1224@kindex -dn
1225@kindex -non_shared
1226@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1227@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1228@itemx -dn
1229@itemx -non_shared
1230@itemx -static
1231Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1232platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1233variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1234may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1235library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1236option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1237option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1238shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1239references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1240libraries.
252b5132
RH
1241
1242@kindex -Bsymbolic
1243@item -Bsymbolic
1244When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1245definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1246for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1247within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1248platforms which support shared libraries.
1249
40b36307
L
1250@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1251@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1252When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1253symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1254This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1255libraries.
1256
55255dae
L
1257@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1258@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1259Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1260typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1261global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1262within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1263to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1264in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1265which support shared libraries.
1266
1267The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1268scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1269
40b36307
L
1270@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1271@item --dynamic-list-data
1272Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1273
1274@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1275@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1276Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1277is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1278
0b8a70d9
L
1279@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1280@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1281Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1282
252b5132
RH
1283@kindex --check-sections
1284@kindex --no-check-sections
1285@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1286@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1287Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1288been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1289perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1290suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1291allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1292restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1293Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1294force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1295option.
252b5132 1296
ddbb8a31
NC
1297@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1298@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1299@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1300@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1301This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1302by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1303command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1304output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1305input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1306specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1307follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1308behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1309
1310This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1311libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1312mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1313their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1314required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1315the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1316dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1317symbols.
1318
252b5132
RH
1319@cindex cross reference table
1320@kindex --cref
1321@item --cref
1322Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1323generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1324Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1325
1326The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1327easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1328sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1329symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1330definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1331where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1332symbol are listed.
252b5132 1333
4818e05f
AM
1334@cindex common allocation
1335@kindex --no-define-common
1336@item --no-define-common
1337This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1338The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1339@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1340
1341The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1342the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1343of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1344forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1345Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1346from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1347This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1348and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1349duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1350paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1351
252b5132 1352@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1353@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1354@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1355Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1356address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1357times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1358limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1359context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1360symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1361constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1362using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1363Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1364space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1365@var{expression}.
1366
1367@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1368@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1369@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1370@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1371@itemx --no-demangle
1372These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1373and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1374present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1375underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1376mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1377different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1378to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1379demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1380is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1381
1382@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1383@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1384@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1385@item -I@var{file}
1386@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1387Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1388generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1389linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1390doing.
1391
7ce691ae 1392@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1393@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1394@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1395@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1396Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1397with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1398
252b5132
RH
1399@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1400@item --force-exe-suffix
1401Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1402
1403If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1404@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1405the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1406option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1407Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1408it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1409
1410@kindex --gc-sections
1411@kindex --no-gc-sections
1412@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1413@item --gc-sections
1414@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1415Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1416targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1417performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1418@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1419
d5465ba2
AM
1420@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1421examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1422symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1423command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1424referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1425libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1426referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1427the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1428relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1429
ac69cbc6 1430This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1431@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1432specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1433a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1434
c17d87de
NC
1435@kindex --print-gc-sections
1436@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1437@cindex garbage collection
1438@item --print-gc-sections
1439@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1440List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1441printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1442collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1443default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1444be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1445line.
1446
30824704
RM
1447@kindex --print-output-format
1448@cindex output format
1449@item --print-output-format
1450Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1451other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1452in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1453
252b5132
RH
1454@cindex help
1455@cindex usage
1456@kindex --help
1457@item --help
1458Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1459
ea20a7da
CC
1460@kindex --target-help
1461@item --target-help
1462Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1463
2509a395
SL
1464@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1465@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1466Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1467@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1468
1469@cindex memory usage
1470@kindex --no-keep-memory
1471@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1472@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1473symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1474instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1475necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1476while linking a large executable.
1477
1478@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1479@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1480@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1481@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1482Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1483is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1484The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1485behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1486libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1487
aa713662
L
1488@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1489@kindex -z muldefs
1490@item --allow-multiple-definition
1491@itemx -z muldefs
1492Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1493report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1494first definition will be used.
1495
b79e8c78 1496@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1497@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1498@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1499@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1500Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1501This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1502determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1503shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1504how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1505
903249d7
NC
1506The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1507referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1508an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1509a shared library.
1510
1511The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1512libraries specified at link time are that:
1513
1514@itemize @bullet
1515@item
1516A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1517that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1518resolvable at load time.
1519@item
1520There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1521symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1522
1523The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1524select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1525architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1526appropriate memset function.
1527@end itemize
b79e8c78 1528
31941635
L
1529@kindex --no-undefined-version
1530@item --no-undefined-version
1531Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1532it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1533will be issued instead.
1534
3e3b46e5
PB
1535@kindex --default-symver
1536@item --default-symver
1537Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1538exported symbols.
1539
1540@kindex --default-imported-symver
1541@item --default-imported-symver
1542Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1543imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1544
252b5132
RH
1545@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1546@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1547Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1548files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1549been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1550This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1551errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1552have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1553inappropriate.
1554
fe7929ce
AM
1555@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1556@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1557Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1558library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1559
252b5132
RH
1560@kindex --no-whole-archive
1561@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1562Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1563archive files.
1564
1565@cindex output file after errors
1566@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1567@item --noinhibit-exec
1568Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1569Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1570errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1571when it issues any error whatsoever.
1572
0a9c1c8e
CD
1573@kindex -nostdlib
1574@item -nostdlib
1575Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1576command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1577(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1578
252b5132 1579@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1580@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1581@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1582@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1583file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1584@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1585object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1586object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1587should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1588usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1589name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1590list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1591command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1592this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1593@end ifclear
1594
36af4a4e
JJ
1595@kindex -pie
1596@kindex --pic-executable
1597@item -pie
1598@itemx --pic-executable
1599@cindex position independent executables
1600Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1601ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1602libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1603address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1604normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1605defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1606
252b5132
RH
1607@kindex -qmagic
1608@item -qmagic
1609This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1610
1611@kindex -Qy
1612@item -Qy
1613This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1614
1615@kindex --relax
1616@cindex synthesizing linker
1617@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1618@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1619@item --relax
28d5f677 1620@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1621An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1622@ifset GENERIC
1623This option is only supported on a few targets.
1624@end ifset
1625@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1626@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1627@end ifset
1628@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1629@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1630@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1631@ifset XTENSA
1632@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1633@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1634@ifset M68HC11
1635@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1636@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1637@ifset NIOSII
1638@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1639@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1640@ifset POWERPC
1641@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1642@end ifset
252b5132 1643
28d5f677
NC
1644On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1645global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1646addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1647synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1648instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1649
1650On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1651debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1652@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1653This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1654family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1655@end ifset
1656
1657@ifset GENERIC
1658On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1659but ignored.
1660@end ifset
1661
28d5f677
NC
1662On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1663@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1664
252b5132
RH
1665@cindex retaining specified symbols
1666@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1667@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1668@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1669@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1670Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1671discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1672symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1673@ifset GENERIC
1674(such as VxWorks)
1675@end ifset
1676where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1677run-time memory.
1678
1679@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1680or symbols needed for relocations.
1681
1682You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1683line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1684
1685@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1686@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1687@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1688@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1689Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1690linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1691arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1692them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1693also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1694objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1695@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1696ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1697@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1698
ff5dcc92 1699The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1700SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1701@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1702runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1703options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1704gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1705file systems.
252b5132 1706
ff5dcc92 1707For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1708followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1709the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1710@end ifset
1711
1712@ifset GENERIC
1713@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1714@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1715@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1716When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1717happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1718of the input files.
1719
1720When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1721non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1722shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1723explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1724specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1725@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1726either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1727appearing multiple times.
1728
28c309a2
NC
1729This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1730that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1731is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1732runtime linker would do.
1733
252b5132 1734The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1735libraries:
252b5132
RH
1736@enumerate
1737@item
ff5dcc92 1738Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1739@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1740Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1741between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1742specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1743used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1744at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1745by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1746the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1747@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1748On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1749@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1750environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1751@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1752On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1753directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1754@item
a1b8d843 1755For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1756variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1757@item
ec4eb78a
L
1758For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1759@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1760libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1761@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1762@item
252b5132
RH
1763The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1764@item
1765For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1766exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1767@end enumerate
1768
1769If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1770warning and continue with the link.
1771@end ifset
1772
1773@kindex -shared
1774@kindex -Bshareable
1775@item -shared
1776@itemx -Bshareable
1777@cindex shared libraries
1778Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1779and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1780shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1781undefined symbols in the link.
1782
252b5132 1783@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1784@item --sort-common
1785@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1786@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1787This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1788ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1789sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1790eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1791between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1792specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1793
2509a395
SL
1794@kindex --sort-section=name
1795@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1796This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1797patterns in the linker script.
1798
2509a395
SL
1799@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1800@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1801This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1802patterns in the linker script.
1803
252b5132 1804@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1805@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1806Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1807each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1808size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1809
1810@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1811@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1812Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1813output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1814This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1815certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1816cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1817that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1818support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1819input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1820more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1821many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1822
1823@kindex --stats
1824@item --stats
1825Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1826as execution time and memory usage.
1827
2509a395 1828@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1829@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1830Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1831configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1832that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1833
252b5132
RH
1834@kindex --traditional-format
1835@cindex traditional format
1836@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1837For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1838the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1839use the traditional format instead.
1840
1841@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1842For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1843symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1844full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1845@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1846trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1847combine duplicate entries.
1848
2509a395
SL
1849@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1850@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1851Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1852address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1853times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1854line.
1855@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1856for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1857@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1858should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1859sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1860
2509a395
SL
1861@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1862@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1863@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1864@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1865@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1866@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1867@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1868Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1869@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1870
2509a395
SL
1871@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1872@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1873@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1874When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1875byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1876
9d5777a3
RM
1877@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1878@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1879@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1880When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1881the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1882text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1883
0d705e9f
AM
1884@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1885@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1886@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1887When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1888model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1889
560e09e9
NC
1890@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1891@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1892Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1893values for @samp{method}:
1894
1895@table @samp
1896@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1897Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1898
1899@item report-all
da8bce14 1900Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1901
1902@item ignore-in-object-files
1903Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1904ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1905
1906@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1907Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1908ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1909when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1910libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1911command line.
1912@end table
1913
1914The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1915by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1916
1917Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1918unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1919can change this to a warning.
1920
1715a13c
L
1921@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1922@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1923@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1924@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1925Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1926supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1927the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1928argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1929
1930@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1931@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1932@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1933Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1934used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1935about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1936is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1937see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1938use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1939symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1940@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1941
7ce691ae 1942@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1943@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1944@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1945@item --warn-common
1946Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1947a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1948but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1949you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1950Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1951warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1952
1953There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1954
1955@table @samp
1956@item int i = 1;
1957A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1958file.
1959
1960@item extern int i;
1961An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1962There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1963variable somewhere.
1964
1965@item int i;
1966A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1967variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1968The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1969single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1970size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1971a definition of the same variable.
1972@end table
1973
1974The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1975Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1976just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1977encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1978a common symbol.
1979
1980@enumerate
1981@item
1982Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1983definition for the symbol.
1984@smallexample
1985@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1986 overridden by definition
1987@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1988@end smallexample
1989
1990@item
1991Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1992the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1993except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1994@smallexample
1995@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1996 overriding common
1997@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1998@end smallexample
1999
2000@item
2001Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2002@smallexample
2003@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2004 of `@var{symbol}'
2005@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2006@end smallexample
2007
2008@item
2009Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2010@smallexample
2011@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2012 overridden by larger common
2013@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2014@end smallexample
2015
2016@item
2017Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2018the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2019encountered in a different order.
2020@smallexample
2021@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2022 overriding smaller common
2023@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2024@end smallexample
2025@end enumerate
2026
2027@kindex --warn-constructors
2028@item --warn-constructors
2029Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2030object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2031detect the use of global constructors.
2032
2033@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2034@item --warn-multiple-gp
2035Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2036This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2037Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2038section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2039of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2040base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2041base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2042bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2043large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2044values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2045option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2046
2047@kindex --warn-once
2048@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2049@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2050@item --warn-once
2051Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2052which refers to it.
2053
2054@kindex --warn-section-align
2055@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2056@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2057@item --warn-section-align
2058Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2059alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2060The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2061is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2062the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2063
8fdd7217
NC
2064@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2065@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2066Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2067
a0c402a5
L
2068@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2069@item --warn-alternate-em
2070Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2071
560e09e9
NC
2072@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2073@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2074If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2075@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2076This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2077
2078@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2079@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2080This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2081it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2082
252b5132
RH
2083@kindex --whole-archive
2084@cindex including an entire archive
2085@item --whole-archive
2086For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2087@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2088in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2089files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2090library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2091library. This option may be used more than once.
2092
7ec229ce 2093Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2094about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2095Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2096list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2097your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2098
2509a395
SL
2099@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2100@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2101Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2102@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2103undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2104@var{symbol}.
2105
2106This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2107wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2108wishes to call the system function, it should call
2109@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2110
2111Here is a trivial example:
2112
2113@smallexample
2114void *
cc2f008e 2115__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2116@{
cc2f008e 2117 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2118 return __real_malloc (c);
2119@}
2120@end smallexample
2121
ff5dcc92 2122If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2123all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2124instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2125call the real @code{malloc} function.
2126
2127You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2128links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2129you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2130file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2131call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2132
6aa29e7b
JJ
2133@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2134@item --eh-frame-hdr
2135Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2136@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2137
e41b3a13
JJ
2138@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2139@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2140Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2141generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2142if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2143
6c1439be
L
2144@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2145@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2146@item --enable-new-dtags
2147@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2148This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2149systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2150@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2151and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2152If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2153created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2154those options are only available for ELF systems.
2155
2d643429 2156@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2157@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2158Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2159close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2160time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2161increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2162value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2163
fdc90cb4
JJ
2164@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2165@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2166Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2167@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2168new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2169the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2170hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2171
35835446
JR
2172@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2173@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2174This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2175linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2176for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2177about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2178
4f9c04f7 2179Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21801021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2181run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2182has been used.
2183
2184The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2185enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2186
c0065db7
RM
2187@kindex --build-id
2188@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2189@item --build-id
2190@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2191Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2192or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2193unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2194@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2195@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2196@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2197the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2198string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2199@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2200is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2201
2202The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2203that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2204unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2205to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2206file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2207string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2208
2209Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2210@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2211@end table
2212
0285c67d
NC
2213@c man end
2214
36f63dca 2215@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2216
0285c67d
NC
2217@c man begin OPTIONS
2218
ff5dcc92 2219The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2220the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2221normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2222use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2223@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2224like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2225symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2226object file).
2227
2228In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2229support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2230PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2231values by either a space or an equals sign.
2232
ff5dcc92 2233@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2234
2235@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2236@item --add-stdcall-alias
2237If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2238as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2239[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2240
2241@kindex --base-file
2242@item --base-file @var{file}
2243Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2244addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2245@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2246[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2247
2248@kindex --dll
2249@item --dll
2250Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2251@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2252file.
bb10df36 2253[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2254
88183869
DK
2255@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2256@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2257@item --enable-long-section-names
2258@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2259The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2260the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2261for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2262fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2263to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2264allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2265disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2266generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2267as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2268with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2269GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2270information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2271option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2272section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2273when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2274image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2275[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2276
252b5132
RH
2277@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2278@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2279@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2280@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2281If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2282do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2283only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2284resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2285undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2286@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2287to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2288warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2289import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2290to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2291feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2292@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2293mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2294[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2295
522f09cd
KT
2296@kindex --leading-underscore
2297@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2298@item --leading-underscore
2299@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2300For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2301in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2302disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2303
252b5132
RH
2304@cindex DLLs, creating
2305@kindex --export-all-symbols
2306@item --export-all-symbols
2307If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2308be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2309otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2310explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2311attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2312option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2313@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2314@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2315exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2316re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2317such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2318@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2319@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2320Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2321not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2322extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2323(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2324These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2325@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2326@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2327@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2328@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2329[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2330
2331@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2332@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2333Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2334exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2335[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2336
2927aaca
NC
2337@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2338@item --exclude-all-symbols
2339Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2340[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2341
252b5132
RH
2342@kindex --file-alignment
2343@item --file-alignment
2344Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2345file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2346512.
bb10df36 2347[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2348
2349@cindex heap size
2350@kindex --heap
2351@item --heap @var{reserve}
2352@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2353Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2354to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2355committed.
bb10df36 2356[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2357
2358@cindex image base
2359@kindex --image-base
2360@item --image-base @var{value}
2361Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2362the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2363is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2364your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2365other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2366for dlls.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2368
2369@kindex --kill-at
2370@item --kill-at
2371If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2372symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2373[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2374
26d2d8a2
BF
2375@kindex --large-address-aware
2376@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2377If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2378header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2379greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2380or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2381section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2382[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2383
f69a2f97
NC
2384@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2385@item --disable-large-address-aware
2386Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2387This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2388driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2389addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2390[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2391
252b5132
RH
2392@kindex --major-image-version
2393@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2394Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2395[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2396
2397@kindex --major-os-version
2398@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2399Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2400[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2401
2402@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2403@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2404Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2405[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2406
2407@kindex --minor-image-version
2408@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2409Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2410[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2411
2412@kindex --minor-os-version
2413@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2414Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2415[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2416
2417@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2418@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2419Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2420[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2421
2422@cindex DEF files, creating
2423@cindex DLLs, creating
2424@kindex --output-def
2425@item --output-def @var{file}
2426The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2427file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2428(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2429library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2430automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2431[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2432
b044cda1
CW
2433@cindex DLLs, creating
2434@kindex --out-implib
2435@item --out-implib @var{file}
2436The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2437import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2438import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2439may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2440makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2441creation step.
bb10df36 2442[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2443
2444@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2445@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2446@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2447Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2448@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2449By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2450for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2451execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2452[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2453
2454@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2455@item --disable-auto-image-base
2456Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2457user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2458default.
bb10df36 2459[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2460
2461@cindex DLLs, linking to
2462@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2463@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2464When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2465search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2466@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2467between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2468uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2469@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2470[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2471
2472@kindex --enable-auto-import
2473@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2474Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2475DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2476building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2477'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2478to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2479specification published by Microsoft.
2480
e2a83dd0
NC
2481Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2482data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2483placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2484around a problem with consts that is described here:
2485http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2486
4d8907ac
DS
2487Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2488see this message:
0d888aac 2489
ece2d90e 2490"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2491documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2492
ece2d90e
NC
2493This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2494ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2495allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2496fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2497constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2498multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2499this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2500of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2501the warning, and exit.
2502
2503There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2504data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2505
2fa9fc65
NC
2506One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2507of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2508this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2509
c0065db7
RM
2510A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2511that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2512there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2513a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2514
2515@example
2516extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2517extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2518 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2519@end example
2520
2521or
2522
2523@example
2524extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2525extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2526 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2527@end example
2528
c0065db7 2529For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2530is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2531
2532@example
2533extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2534extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2535 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2536@end example
2537
c406afaf
NC
2538or
2539
2540@example
2541extern long long extern_ll;
2542extern_ll -->
2543 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2544@end example
2545
2fa9fc65 2546A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2547'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2548@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2549requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2550building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2551merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2552between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2553constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2554
2555Original:
2556@example
2557--foo.h
2558extern int arr[];
2559--foo.c
2560#include "foo.h"
2561void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2562 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2563@}
2564@end example
2565
2566Solution 1:
2567@example
2568--foo.h
2569extern int arr[];
2570--foo.c
2571#include "foo.h"
2572void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2573 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2574 volatile int *parr = arr;
2575 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2576@}
2577@end example
2578
2579Solution 2:
2580@example
2581--foo.h
2582/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2583#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2584 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2585#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2586#else
2587#define FOO_IMPORT
2588#endif
2589extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2590--foo.c
2591#include "foo.h"
2592void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2593 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2594@}
2595@end example
2596
c0065db7 2597A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2598library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2599for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2600functions).
bb10df36 2601[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2602
2603@kindex --disable-auto-import
2604@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2605Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2606@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2608
2fa9fc65
NC
2609@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2610@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2611If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2612that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2613a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2614environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2615[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2616
2617@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2618@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2619Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2620DLLs.
bb10df36 2621[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2622
b044cda1
CW
2623@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2624@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2625Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2626[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2627
252b5132
RH
2628@kindex --section-alignment
2629@item --section-alignment
2630Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2631addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2632[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2633
2634@cindex stack size
2635@kindex --stack
2636@item --stack @var{reserve}
2637@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2638Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2639to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2640committed.
bb10df36 2641[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2642
2643@kindex --subsystem
2644@item --subsystem @var{which}
2645@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2646@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2647Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2648legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2649@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2650the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2651@var{which}.
bb10df36 2652[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2653
2f563b51
DK
2654The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2655of the PE file header:
2656[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2657
2658@kindex --dynamicbase
2659@item --dynamicbase
2660The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2661randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2662Vista for i386 PE targets.
2663
2664@kindex --forceinteg
2665@item --forceinteg
2666Code integrity checks are enforced.
2667
2668@kindex --nxcompat
2669@item --nxcompat
2670The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2671This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2672
2673@kindex --no-isolation
2674@item --no-isolation
2675Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2676
2677@kindex --no-seh
2678@item --no-seh
2679The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2680this image.
2681
2682@kindex --no-bind
2683@item --no-bind
2684Do not bind this image.
2685
2686@kindex --wdmdriver
2687@item --wdmdriver
2688The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2689
2f563b51
DK
2690@kindex --tsaware
2691@item --tsaware
2692The image is Terminal Server aware.
2693
0cb112f7
CF
2694@kindex --insert-timestamp
2695@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2696@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2697Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2698as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2699other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2700will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2701same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2702can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2703that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2704identically.
252b5132
RH
2705@end table
2706
0285c67d
NC
2707@c man end
2708
ac145307
BS
2709@ifset C6X
2710@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2711
2712@c man begin OPTIONS
2713
2714The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2715libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2716all executables use an index of 0.
2717
2718@table @gcctabopt
2719
2720@kindex --dsbt-size
2721@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2722This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2723or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2724entries.
2725
2726@kindex --dsbt-index
2727@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2728This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2729to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2730executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2731@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2732
fbd9ad90
PB
2733@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2734The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2735exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2736
ac145307
BS
2737@end table
2738
2739@c man end
2740@end ifset
2741
93fd0973
SC
2742@ifset M68HC11
2743@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2744
2745@c man begin OPTIONS
2746
2747The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2748memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2749
2750@table @gcctabopt
2751
2752@kindex --no-trampoline
2753@item --no-trampoline
2754This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2755is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2756instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2757
2758@kindex --bank-window
2759@item --bank-window @var{name}
2760This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2761the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2762The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2763paging and addresses within the memory window.
2764
2765@end table
2766
2767@c man end
2768@end ifset
2769
7fb9f789
NC
2770@ifset M68K
2771@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2772
2773@c man begin OPTIONS
2774
2775The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2776when linking for 68K targets.
2777
2778@table @gcctabopt
2779
2780@kindex --got
2781@item --got=@var{type}
2782This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2783@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2784@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2785Info entry for @file{ld}.
2786
2787@end table
2788
2789@c man end
2790@end ifset
2791
833794fc
MR
2792@ifset MIPS
2793@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2794
2795@c man begin OPTIONS
2796
2797The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2798generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2799
2800@table @gcctabopt
2801
2802@kindex --insn32
2803@item --insn32
2804@kindex --no-insn32
2805@itemx --no-insn32
2806These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2807generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2808or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
280932-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2810used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2811possible.
2812
2813@end table
2814
2815@c man end
2816@end ifset
2817
252b5132
RH
2818@ifset UsesEnvVars
2819@node Environment
2820@section Environment Variables
2821
0285c67d
NC
2822@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2823
560e09e9 2824You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2825@ifclear SingleFormat
2826@code{GNUTARGET},
2827@end ifclear
2828@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2829
36f63dca 2830@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2831@kindex GNUTARGET
2832@cindex default input format
2833@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2834use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2835of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2836@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2837of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2838attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2839this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2840there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2841object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2842BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2843in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2844@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2845
2846@kindex LDEMULATION
2847@cindex default emulation
2848@cindex emulation, default
2849@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2850@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2851behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2852available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2853the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2854variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2855linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2856
2857@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2858@cindex demangling, default
2859Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2860@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2861default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2862a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2863may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2864options.
2865
0285c67d
NC
2866@c man end
2867@end ifset
2868
252b5132
RH
2869@node Scripts
2870@chapter Linker Scripts
2871
2872@cindex scripts
2873@cindex linker scripts
2874@cindex command files
2875Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2876written in the linker command language.
2877
2878The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2879the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2880the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2881more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2882direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2883described below.
2884
2885The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2886yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2887linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2888to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2889such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2890
2891You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2892line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2893default linker script.
2894
2895You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2896to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2897Linker Scripts}.
2898
2899@menu
2900* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2901* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2902* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2903* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2904* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2905* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2906* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2907* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2908* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2909* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2910* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2911@end menu
2912
2913@node Basic Script Concepts
2914@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2915@cindex linker script concepts
2916We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2917describe the linker script language.
2918
2919The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2920file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2921@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2922The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2923purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2924among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2925section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2926in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2927
2928Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2929also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2930contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2931the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2932A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2933area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2934loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2935which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2936of debugging information.
2937
2938Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2939first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2940the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2941@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2942section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2943same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2944is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2945(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2946based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2947RAM address would be the VMA.
2948
2949You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2950program with the @samp{-h} option.
2951
2952Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2953@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2954has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2955information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2956will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2957static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2958referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2959
2960You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2961program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2962option.
2963
2964@node Script Format
2965@section Linker Script Format
2966@cindex linker script format
2967Linker scripts are text files.
2968
2969You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2970either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2971symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2972generally ignored.
2973
2974Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2975If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2976otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2977double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2978file name.
2979
2980You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2981@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2982to whitespace.
2983
2984@node Simple Example
2985@section Simple Linker Script Example
2986@cindex linker script example
2987@cindex example of linker script
2988Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2989
2990The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2991@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2992memory layout of the output file.
2993
2994The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2995describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2996code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2997@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2998Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2999your input files.
3000
3001For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30020x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3003linker script which will do that:
3004@smallexample
3005SECTIONS
3006@{
3007 . = 0x10000;
3008 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3009 . = 0x8000000;
3010 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3011 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3012@}
3013@end smallexample
3014
3015You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3016followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3017descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3018
252b5132
RH
3019The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3020sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3021counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3022other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3023current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3024incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3025@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3026
3027The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3028required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3029after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3030which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3031wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3032means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3033
3034Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3035@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3036@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3037
3038The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3039the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3040at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3041output section, the value of the location counter will be
3042@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3043effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3044immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3045
3046The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3047alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3048example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3049sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3050may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3051sections.
3052
3053That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3054
3055@node Simple Commands
3056@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3057@cindex linker script simple commands
3058In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3059
3060@menu
3061* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3062* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3063@ifclear SingleFormat
3064* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3065@end ifclear
3066
4a93e180 3067* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3068* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3069@end menu
3070
3071@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3072@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3073@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3074@cindex start of execution
3075@cindex first instruction
3076@cindex entry point
3077The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3078point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3079entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3080@smallexample
3081ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3082@end smallexample
3083
3084There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3085entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3086stopping when one of them succeeds:
3087@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3088@item
252b5132 3089the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3090@item
252b5132 3091the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3092@item
3ab904c4
NC
3093the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3094targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3095check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3096@item
252b5132 3097the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3098@item
252b5132
RH
3099The address @code{0}.
3100@end itemize
3101
3102@node File Commands
36f63dca 3103@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3104@cindex linker script file commands
3105Several linker script commands deal with files.
3106
3107@table @code
3108@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3109@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3110@cindex including a linker script
3111Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3112be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3113with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
311410 levels deep.
3115
4006703d
NS
3116You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3117@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3118
252b5132
RH
3119@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3120@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3121@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3122@cindex input files in linker scripts
3123@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3124@cindex linker script input object files
3125The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3126in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3127
3128For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3129a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3130then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3131
3132In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3133script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3134
e3f2db7f
AO
3135In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3136with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3137located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3138for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3139open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3140linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3141description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3142
ff5dcc92 3143If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3144name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3145@samp{-l}.
3146
3147When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3148files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3149script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3150
3151@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3152@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3153@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3154@cindex grouping input files
3155The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3156files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3157new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3158in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3159
b717d30e
JJ
3160@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3161@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3162@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3163This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3164commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3165as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3166with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3167when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3168@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3169and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3170setting afterwards.
3171
252b5132
RH
3172@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3173@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3174@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3175The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3176@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3177@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3178Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3179precedence.
3180
3181You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3182output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3183
3184@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3185@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3186@cindex library search path in linker script
3187@cindex archive search path in linker script
3188@cindex search path in linker script
3189The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3190@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3191@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3192on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3193are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3194the command line option are searched first.
3195
3196@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3197@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3198@cindex first input file
3199The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3200that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3201though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3202when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3203first file.
3204@end table
3205
3206@ifclear SingleFormat
3207@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3208@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3209A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3210
3211@table @code
3212@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3213@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3214@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3215@cindex output file format in linker script
3216The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3217output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3218exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3219(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3220line option takes precedence.
3221
3222You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3223formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3224This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3225desired endianness.
3226
3227If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3228will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3229output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3230used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3231
3232For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3233command:
3234@smallexample
3235OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3236@end smallexample
3237This says that the default format for the output file is
3238@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3239option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3240format.
3241
3242@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3243@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3244@cindex input file format in linker script
3245The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3246files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3247This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3248(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3249is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3250command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3251@end table
3252@end ifclear
3253
4a93e180
NC
3254@node REGION_ALIAS
3255@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3256@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3257@cindex region alias
3258@cindex region names
3259
3260Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3261@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3262
3263@smallexample
3264REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3265@end smallexample
3266
3267The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3268memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3269to memory regions. An example follows.
3270
3271Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3272memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3273that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3274non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3275access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3276read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3277sections:
3278
3279@itemize @bullet
3280@item
3281@code{.text} program code;
3282@item
3283@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3284@item
3285@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3286@item
3287@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3288@end itemize
3289
3290The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3291part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3292output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3293systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3294@code{C}:
3295@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3296@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3297@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3298@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3299@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3300@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3301@end multitable
3302The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3303loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3304the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3305the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3306
3307The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3308includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3309memory layout:
3310@smallexample
3311INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3312
3313SECTIONS
3314 @{
3315 .text :
3316 @{
3317 *(.text)
3318 @} > REGION_TEXT
3319 .rodata :
3320 @{
3321 *(.rodata)
3322 rodata_end = .;
3323 @} > REGION_RODATA
3324 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3325 @{
3326 data_start = .;
3327 *(.data)
3328 @} > REGION_DATA
3329 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3330 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3331 .bss :
3332 @{
3333 *(.bss)
3334 @} > REGION_BSS
3335 @}
3336@end smallexample
3337
3338Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3339regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3340variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3341@table @code
3342@item A
3343Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3344@smallexample
3345MEMORY
3346 @{
3347 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3348 @}
3349
3350REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3351REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3352REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3353REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3354@end smallexample
3355@item B
3356Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3357into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3358@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3359@smallexample
3360MEMORY
3361 @{
3362 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3363 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3364 @}
3365
3366REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3367REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3368REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3369REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3370@end smallexample
3371@item C
3372Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3373@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3374initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3375system start into the @code{RAM}.
3376@smallexample
3377MEMORY
3378 @{
3379 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3380 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3381 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3382 @}
3383
3384REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3385REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3386REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3387REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3388@end smallexample
3389@end table
3390
3391It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3392@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3393necessary:
3394@smallexample
3395#include <string.h>
3396
3397extern char data_start [];
3398extern char data_size [];
3399extern char data_load_start [];
3400
3401void copy_data(void)
3402@{
3403 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3404 @{
3405 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3406 @}
3407@}
3408@end smallexample
3409
252b5132 3410@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3411@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3412There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3413
3414@table @code
3415@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3416@kindex ASSERT
3417@cindex assertion in linker script
3418Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3419with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3420
3421@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3422@kindex EXTERN
3423@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3424Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3425symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3426modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3427each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3428command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3429
3430@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3431@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3432@cindex common allocation in linker script
3433This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3434to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3435output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3436
4818e05f
AM
3437@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3438@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3439@cindex common allocation in linker script
3440This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3441command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3442to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3443
53d25da6
AM
3444@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3445@kindex INSERT
3446@cindex insert user script into default script
3447This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3448augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3449inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3450@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3451default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3452sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3453linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3454insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3455linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3456default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3457of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3458to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3459is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3460
3461@smallexample
3462SECTIONS
3463@{
3464 OVERLAY :
3465 @{
3466 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3467 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3468 @}
3469@}
3470INSERT AFTER .text;
3471@end smallexample
3472
252b5132
RH
3473@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3474@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3475@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3476This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3477references among certain output sections.
3478
3479In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3480using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3481will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3482errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3483a function defined in the other section.
3484
3485The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3486@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3487an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3488@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3489names.
3490
3491@ifclear SingleFormat
3492@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3493@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3494@cindex machine architecture
3495@cindex architecture
3496Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3497of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3498architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3499the @samp{-f} option.
3500@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3501
3502@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3503@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3504This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3505@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3506in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3507@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3508@end table
3509
3510@node Assignments
3511@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3512@cindex assignment in scripts
3513@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3514@cindex variables, defining
3515You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3516the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3517
3518@menu
3519* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3520* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3521* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3522* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3523* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3524@end menu
3525
3526@node Simple Assignments
3527@subsection Simple Assignments
3528
3529You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3530
3531@table @code
3532@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3533@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3534@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3535@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3536@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3537@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3538@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3539@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3540@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3541@end table
3542
3543The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3544@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3545defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3546
3547The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3548may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3549
3550The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3551
3552Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3553
3554You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3555statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3556section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3557
3558The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3559expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3560
3561Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3562assignments may be used:
3563
3564@smallexample
3565floating_point = 0;
3566SECTIONS
3567@{
3568 .text :
3569 @{
3570 *(.text)
3571 _etext = .;
3572 @}
156e34dd 3573 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3574 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3575@}
3576@end smallexample
3577@noindent
3578In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3579zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3580the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3581defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3582upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3583
eb8476a6
MR
3584@node HIDDEN
3585@subsection HIDDEN
3586@cindex HIDDEN
3587For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3588exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3589
3590Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3591@code{HIDDEN}:
3592
3593@smallexample
3594HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3595SECTIONS
3596@{
3597 .text :
3598 @{
3599 *(.text)
3600 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3601 @}
3602 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3603 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3604@}
3605@end smallexample
3606@noindent
3607In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3608
252b5132
RH
3609@node PROVIDE
3610@subsection PROVIDE
3611@cindex PROVIDE
3612In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3613only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3614the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3615@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3616@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3617@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3618@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3619@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3620
3621Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3622@smallexample
3623SECTIONS
3624@{
3625 .text :
3626 @{
3627 *(.text)
3628 _etext = .;
3629 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3630 @}
3631@}
3632@end smallexample
3633
3634In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3635underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3636the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3637underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3638If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3639linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3640
7af8e998
L
3641@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3642@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3643@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3644Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3645hidden and won't be exported.
3646
73ae6183
NC
3647@node Source Code Reference
3648@subsection Source Code Reference
3649
3650Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3651intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3652a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3653symbol that does not have a value.
3654
3655Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3656transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3657stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3658prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3659mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3660of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3661variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3662linker script variable might be referred to as:
3663
3664@smallexample
3665 extern int foo;
3666@end smallexample
3667
3668But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3669
3670@smallexample
3671 _foo = 1000;
3672@end smallexample
3673
3674In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3675transformation has taken place.
3676
3677When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3678things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3679in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3680second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3681table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3682contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3683value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3684
3685@smallexample
3686 int foo = 1000;
3687@end smallexample
3688
10bf6894 3689creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3690holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3691number 1000 is initially stored.
3692
3693When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3694first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3695memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3696So:
3697
3698@smallexample
3699 foo = 1;
3700@end smallexample
3701
3702looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3703associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3704address. Whereas:
3705
3706@smallexample
3707 int * a = & foo;
3708@end smallexample
3709
10bf6894 3710looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3711and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3712the variable @samp{a}.
3713
3714Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3715the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3716an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3717
3718@smallexample
3719 foo = 1000;
3720@end smallexample
3721
3722creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3723the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3724address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3725linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3726access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3727
3728Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3729you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3730use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3731section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3732linker script contains these declarations:
3733
3734@smallexample
3735@group
3736 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3737 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3738 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3739@end group
3740@end smallexample
3741
3742Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3743
3744@smallexample
3745@group
3746 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3747
73ae6183
NC
3748 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3749@end group
3750@end smallexample
3751
3752Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3753
252b5132 3754@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3755@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3756@kindex SECTIONS
3757The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3758into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3759
3760The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3761@smallexample
3762SECTIONS
3763@{
3764 @var{sections-command}
3765 @var{sections-command}
3766 @dots{}
3767@}
3768@end smallexample
3769
3770Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3771
3772@itemize @bullet
3773@item
3774an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3775@item
3776a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3777@item
3778an output section description
3779@item
3780an overlay description
3781@end itemize
3782
3783The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3784@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3785those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3786understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3787the layout of the output file.
3788
3789Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3790below.
3791
3792If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3793linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3794section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3795input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3796example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3797in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3798
3799@menu
3800* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3801* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3802* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3803* Input Section:: Input section description
3804* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3805* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3806* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3807* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3808* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3809@end menu
3810
3811@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3812@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3813The full description of an output section looks like this:
3814@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3815@group
7e7d5768 3816@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3817 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3818 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3819 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3820 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3821 @{
3822 @var{output-section-command}
3823 @var{output-section-command}
3824 @dots{}
abc9061b 3825 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3826@end group
3827@end smallexample
3828
3829Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3830
3831The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3832name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3833The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3834the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3835The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3836
3837Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3838
3839@itemize @bullet
3840@item
3841a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3842@item
3843an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3844@item
3845data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3846@item
3847a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3848@end itemize
3849
3850@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3851@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3852@cindex name, section
3853@cindex section name
3854The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3855meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3856support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3857must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3858example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3859output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3860names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3861quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3862characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3863commas must be quoted.
3864
3865The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3866Discarding}.
3867
3868@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3869@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3870@cindex address, section
3871@cindex section address
3872The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3873address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3874is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3875
3876If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3877section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3878to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3879alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3880contained within the output section.
3881
3882The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3883
3884@itemize @bullet
3885@item
3886If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3887is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3888in that region.
3889
3890@item
3891If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3892regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3893section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3894be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3895
3896@item
3897If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3898the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3899counter.
3900@end itemize
3901
3902@noindent
3903For example:
3904
252b5132
RH
3905@smallexample
3906.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3907@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3908
252b5132
RH
3909@noindent
3910and
ea5cae92 3911
252b5132
RH
3912@smallexample
3913.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3914@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3915
252b5132
RH
3916@noindent
3917are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3918@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3919counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3920counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3921input sections.
252b5132
RH
3922
3923The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3924For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3925so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3926do something like this:
3927@smallexample
3928.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3929@end smallexample
3930@noindent
3931This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3932aligned upward to the specified value.
3933
3934Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3935location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3936sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3937
3938@node Input Section
36f63dca 3939@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3940@cindex input sections
3941@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3942The most common output section command is an input section description.
3943
3944The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3945You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3946in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3947map the input files into your memory layout.
3948
3949@menu
3950* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3951* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3952* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3953* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3954* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3955@end menu
3956
3957@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3958@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3959@cindex input section basics
3960An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3961by a list of section names in parentheses.
3962
3963The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3964describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3965
3966The most common input section description is to include all input
3967sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3968include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3969@smallexample
3970*(.text)
3971@end smallexample
3972@noindent
18625d54
CM
3973Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3974of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3975match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3976example:
252b5132 3977@smallexample
b4346c09 3978*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3979@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3980will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3981@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3982
3983There are two ways to include more than one section:
3984@smallexample
3985*(.text .rdata)
3986*(.text) *(.rdata)
3987@end smallexample
3988@noindent
3989The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3990@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3991first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3992they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3993@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3994@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3995
3996You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3997You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3998needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3999@smallexample
4000data.o(.data)
4001@end smallexample
4002
ae17ab41
CM
4003To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4004of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4005
4006Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4007
4008@smallexample
4009@group
4010SECTIONS @{
4011 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4012 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4013@}
4014@end group
4015@end smallexample
4016
4017In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4018input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4019@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4020@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4021whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4022
967928e9
AM
4023You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4024matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4025with no whitespace around the colon.
4026
4027@table @samp
4028@item archive:file
4029matches file within archive
4030@item archive:
4031matches the whole archive
4032@item :file
4033matches file but not one in an archive
4034@end table
4035
4036Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4037wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4038single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4039@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4040within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4041also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4042other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4043from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4044command.
4045
252b5132
RH
4046If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4047the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4048commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4049@smallexample
4050data.o
4051@end smallexample
4052
967928e9
AM
4053When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4054and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4055characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4056name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4057did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4058though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4059@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4060the archive search path.
4061
4062@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4063@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4064@cindex input section wildcards
4065@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4066@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4067@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4068In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4069name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4070
4071The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4072pattern for the file name.
4073
4074The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4075
4076@table @samp
4077@item *
4078matches any number of characters
4079@item ?
4080matches any single character
4081@item [@var{chars}]
4082matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4083character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4084@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4085@item \
4086quotes the following character
4087@end table
4088
4089When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4090will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4091Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4092exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4093@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4094a @samp{/} character.
4095
4096File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4097specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4098does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4099
4100If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4101appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4102will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4103sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4104@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4105@smallexample
4106.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4107.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4108@end smallexample
4109
bcaa7b3e 4110@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4111Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4112in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4113this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4114pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4115@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4116into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4117
bcaa7b3e
L
4118@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4119@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4120difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4121descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4122Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4123reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4124
02ecc8e9
L
4125@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4126@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4127difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4128ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4129encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4130
bcaa7b3e
L
4131@cindex SORT
4132@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4133
4134When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4135can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4136
4137@enumerate
4138@item
4139@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4140It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4141sections have the same name.
4142@item
4143@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4144It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4145sections have the same alignment.
4146@item
c0065db7 4147@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4148treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4149@item
4150@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4151is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4152@item
4153All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4154@end enumerate
4155
4156When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4157section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4158takes precedence over the command line option.
4159
4160If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4161command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4162treated as nested sorting command.
4163
4164@enumerate
4165@item
4166@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4167@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4168@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4169@item
4170@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4171@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4172@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4173@end enumerate
4174
4175If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4176command line option will be ignored.
4177
eda680f8
L
4178@cindex SORT_NONE
4179@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4180section sorting option.
4181
252b5132
RH
4182If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4183@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4184precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4185
4186This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4187files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4188sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4189The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4190with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4191linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4192@smallexample
4193@group
4194SECTIONS @{
4195 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4196 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4197 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4198 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4199@}
4200@end group
4201@end smallexample
4202
4203@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4204@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4205@cindex common symbol placement
4206@cindex uninitialized data placement
4207A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4208file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4209linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4210named @samp{COMMON}.
4211
4212You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4213other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4214particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4215input files are placed in another section.
4216
4217In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4218@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4219@smallexample
4220.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4221@end smallexample
4222
4223@cindex scommon section
4224@cindex small common symbols
4225Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4226example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4227symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4228different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4229the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4230symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4231to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4232locations.
4233
4234@cindex [COMMON]
4235You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4236notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4237@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4238
4239@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4240@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4241@cindex KEEP
4242@cindex garbage collection
4243When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4244it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4245This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4246with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4247@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4248
4249@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4250@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4251The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4252to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4253start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4254@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4255follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4256@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4257@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4258All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4259files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4260
4261@smallexample
4262@group
4263SECTIONS @{
4264 outputa 0x10000 :
4265 @{
4266 all.o
4267 foo.o (.input1)
4268 @}
36f63dca
NC
4269@end group
4270@group
252b5132
RH
4271 outputb :
4272 @{
4273 foo.o (.input2)
4274 foo1.o (.input1)
4275 @}
36f63dca
NC
4276@end group
4277@group
252b5132
RH
4278 outputc :
4279 @{
4280 *(.input1)
4281 *(.input2)
4282 @}
4283@}
4284@end group
a1ab1d2a 4285@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4286
4287@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4288@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4289@cindex data
4290@cindex section data
4291@cindex output section data
4292@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4293@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4294@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4295@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4296@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4297You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4298@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4299an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4300parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4301value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4302counter.
4303
4304The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4305store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4306bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4307stored.
4308
4309For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4310of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4311@smallexample
4312BYTE(1)
4313LONG(addr)
4314@end smallexample
4315
4316When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4317same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4318target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4319@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4320@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4321
4322If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4323which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4324When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4325true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4326endianness of the first input object file.
4327
36f63dca 4328Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4329between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4330@smallexample
4331SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4332@end smallexample
4333whereas this will work:
4334@smallexample
4335SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4336@end smallexample
4337
252b5132
RH
4338@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4339@cindex holes, filling
4340@cindex unspecified memory
4341You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4342current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4343otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4344gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4345with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4346necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4347point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4348than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4349different parts of an output section.
4350
4351This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4352value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4353@smallexample
563e308f 4354FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4355@end smallexample
4356
4357The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4358section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4359part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4360entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4361precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4362expression.
252b5132
RH
4363
4364@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4365@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4366There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4367commands.
4368
4369@table @code
4370@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4371@cindex input filename symbols
4372@cindex filename symbols
4373@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4374The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4375The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4376file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4377the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4378
4379This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4380normally used for any other object file format.
4381
4382@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4383@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4384@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4385@item CONSTRUCTORS
4386When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4387unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4388destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4389arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4390automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4391For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4392linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4393@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4394ignored for other object file formats.
4395
4396The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4397constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4398Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4399the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4400first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4401of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4402compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4403formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4404@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4405the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4406destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4407@code{exit}.
4408
4409For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4410arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4411addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4412and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4413linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4414runtime code expects to see.
4415
4416@smallexample
4417 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4418 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4419 *(.ctors)
4420 LONG(0)
4421 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4422 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4423 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4424 *(.dtors)
4425 LONG(0)
4426 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4427@end smallexample
4428
4429If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4430which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4431are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4432are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4433command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4434@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4435@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4436@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4437
4438Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4439and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4440need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4441scripts.
4442
4443@end table
4444
4445@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4446@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4447@cindex discarding sections
4448@cindex sections, discarding
4449@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4450The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4451This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4452may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4453@smallexample
49c13adb 4454.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4455@end smallexample
4456@noindent
4457will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4458@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4459sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4460space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4461too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4462space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4463@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4464@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4465This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4466
a0976ea4 4467The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4468on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4469symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4470the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4471section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4472
4473@cindex /DISCARD/
4474The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4475input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4476section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4477
4478@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4479@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4480@cindex output section attributes
4481We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4482like this:
0c71d759 4483
252b5132 4484@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4485@group
7e7d5768 4486@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4487 [AT(@var{lma})]
4488 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4489 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4490 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4491 @{
4492 @var{output-section-command}
4493 @var{output-section-command}
4494 @dots{}
562d3460 4495 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4496@end group
4497@end smallexample
0c71d759 4498
252b5132
RH
4499We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4500@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4501remaining section attributes.
4502
a1ab1d2a 4503@menu
252b5132
RH
4504* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4505* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4506* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4507* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4508* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4509* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4510* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4511* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4512@end menu
4513
4514@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4515@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4516Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4517parentheses. The following types are defined:
4518
4519@table @code
4520@item NOLOAD
4521The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4522loaded into memory when the program is run.
4523@item DSECT
4524@itemx COPY
4525@itemx INFO
4526@itemx OVERLAY
4527These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4528rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4529marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4530section when the program is run.
4531@end table
4532
4533@kindex NOLOAD
4534@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4535@cindex loading, preventing
4536The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4537the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4538the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4539@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4540need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4541@smallexample
4542@group
4543SECTIONS @{
4544 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4545 @dots{}
4546@}
4547@end group
4548@end smallexample
4549
4550@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4551@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4552@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4553@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4554@cindex load address
4555@cindex section load address
4556Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4557@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4558@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4559specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4560address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4561
ea5cae92
NC
4562The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4563specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4564takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4565load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4566region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4567
4568If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4569section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4570load address:
4571
4572@itemize @bullet
4573@item
4574If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4575the LMA address as well.
4576
4577@item
4578If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4579
4580@item
4581Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4582with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4583section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4584VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4585the last section in the located region.
4586
4587@item
4588If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4589that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4590
4591@item
4592If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4593section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4594@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4595
4596@cindex ROM initialized data
4597@cindex initialized data in ROM
4598This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4599example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4600called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4601@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4602even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4603uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4604defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4605counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4606
4607@smallexample
4608@group
4609SECTIONS
4610 @{
4611 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4612 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4613 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4614 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4615 .bss 0x3000 :
4616 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4617@}
4618@end group
4619@end smallexample
4620
4621The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4622this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4623the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4624how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4625script.
4626
4627@smallexample
4628@group
4629extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4630char *src = &_etext;
4631char *dst = &_data;
4632
ea5cae92
NC
4633/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4634while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4635 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4636
ea5cae92 4637/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4638for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4639 *dst = 0;
4640@end group
4641@end smallexample
4642
bbf115d3
L
4643@node Forced Output Alignment
4644@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4645@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4646@cindex forcing output section alignment
4647@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4648You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4649alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4650intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4651
7e7d5768
AM
4652@node Forced Input Alignment
4653@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4654@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4655@cindex forcing input section alignment
4656@cindex input section alignment
4657You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4658SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4659sections, whether larger or smaller.
4660
0c71d759
NC
4661@node Output Section Constraint
4662@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4663@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4664@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4665@cindex constraints on output sections
4666You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4667of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4668read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4669@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4670
252b5132 4671@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4672@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4673@kindex >@var{region}
4674@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4675@cindex memory regions and sections
4676You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4677using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4678
4679Here is a simple example:
4680@smallexample
4681@group
4682MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4683SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4684@end group
4685@end smallexample
4686
4687@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4688@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4689@kindex :@var{phdr}
4690@cindex section, assigning to program header
4691@cindex program headers and sections
4692You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4693using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4694one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4695assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4696@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4697linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4698
4699Here is a simple example:
4700@smallexample
4701@group
4702PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4703SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4704@end group
4705@end smallexample
4706
4707@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4708@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4709@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4710@cindex section fill pattern
4711@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4712You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4713@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4714(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4715within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4716alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4717necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4718of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4719an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4720fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4721other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4722pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4723expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4724
4725You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4726output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4727
4728Here is a simple example:
4729@smallexample
4730@group
563e308f 4731SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4732@end group
4733@end smallexample
4734
4735@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4736@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4737@kindex OVERLAY
4738@cindex overlays
4739An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4740are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4741the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4742copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4743required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4744can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4745than another.
4746
4747Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4748@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4749output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4750command is as follows:
4751@smallexample
4752@group
4753OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4754 @{
4755 @var{secname1}
4756 @{
4757 @var{output-section-command}
4758 @var{output-section-command}
4759 @dots{}
4760 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4761 @var{secname2}
4762 @{
4763 @var{output-section-command}
4764 @var{output-section-command}
4765 @dots{}
4766 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4767 @dots{}
abc9061b 4768 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4769@end group
4770@end smallexample
4771
4772Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4773section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4774section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4775those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4776except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4777sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4778
abc9061b
CC
4779The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4780the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4781
252b5132
RH
4782The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4783addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4784memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4785whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4786and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4787and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4788
56dd11f0
NC
4789If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4790references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4791the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4792sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4793@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4794
4795For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4796provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4797defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4798@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4799the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4800within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4801symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4802
4803At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4804the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4805
4806Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4807@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4808@smallexample
4809@group
4810 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4811 @{
4812 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4813 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4814 @}
4815@end group
4816@end smallexample
4817@noindent
4818This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4819address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4820@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4821following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4822@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4823@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4824
4825C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4826like the following.
4827
4828@smallexample
4829@group
4830 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4831 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4832 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4833@end group
4834@end smallexample
4835
4836Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4837everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4838example could have been written identically as follows.
4839
4840@smallexample
4841@group
4842 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4843 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4844 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4845 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4846 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4847 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4848 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4849@end group
4850@end smallexample
4851
4852@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4853@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4854@kindex MEMORY
4855@cindex memory regions
4856@cindex regions of memory
4857@cindex allocating memory
4858@cindex discontinuous memory
4859The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4860memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4861
4862The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4863memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4864may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4865can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4866set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4867regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4868around to fit into the available regions.
4869
4870A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4871command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4872you wish. The syntax is:
4873@smallexample
4874@group
a1ab1d2a 4875MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4876 @{
4877 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4878 @dots{}
4879 @}
4880@end group
4881@end smallexample
4882
4883The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4884region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4885Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4886with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4887must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4888add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4889command.
252b5132
RH
4890
4891@cindex memory region attributes
4892The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4893whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4894not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4895@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4896section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4897the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4898them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4899
4900The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4901@table @samp
4902@item R
4903Read-only section
4904@item W
4905Read/write section
4906@item X
4907Executable section
4908@item A
4909Allocatable section
4910@item I
4911Initialized section
4912@item L
4913Same as @samp{I}
4914@item !
c09e9a8c 4915Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4916@end table
4917
4918If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4919@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4920attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4921in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4922attributes.
4923
4924@kindex ORIGIN =
4925@kindex o =
4926@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4927The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4928the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4929cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4930abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4931@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4932
4933@kindex LENGTH =
4934@kindex len =
4935@kindex l =
4936The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4937region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4938be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4939@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4940
4941In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4942available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4943and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4944linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4945is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4946or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4947explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4948region.
4949
4950@smallexample
4951@group
a1ab1d2a 4952MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4953 @{
4954 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4955 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4956 @}
4957@end group
4958@end smallexample
4959
4960Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4961specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4962@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4963a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4964output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4965was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4966the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4967output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4968region, the linker will issue an error message.
4969
3ec57632 4970It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4971expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4972@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4973
4974@smallexample
4975@group
c0065db7 4976 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4977@end group
4978@end smallexample
4979
252b5132
RH
4980@node PHDRS
4981@section PHDRS Command
4982@kindex PHDRS
4983@cindex program headers
4984@cindex ELF program headers
4985@cindex program segments
4986@cindex segments, ELF
4987The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4988@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4989loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4990program with the @samp{-p} option.
4991
4992When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4993reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4994program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4995This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4996interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4997
4998The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4999in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5000precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5001the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5002not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5003
5004The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5005generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5006ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5007
5008This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5009@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5010
5011@smallexample
5012@group
5013PHDRS
5014@{
5015 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5016 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5017@}
5018@end group
5019@end smallexample
5020
5021The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5022of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5023header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5024with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5025must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5026is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5027
5028Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5029system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5030specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5031sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5032attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5033Section Phdr}.
5034
5035It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5036merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5037repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5038contain the section.
5039
5040If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5041then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5042not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5043convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5044placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5045default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5046segment at all.
5047
5048@kindex FILEHDR
5049@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5050You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5051the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5052The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5053file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5054include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5055segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5056these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5057
5058The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5059value of the keyword.
5060
5061@table @asis
5062@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5063Indicates an unused program header.
5064
5065@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5066Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5067the file.
5068
5069@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5070Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5071
5072@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5073Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5074found.
5075
5076@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5077Indicates a segment holding note information.
5078
5079@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5080A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5081ABI.
5082
5083@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5084Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5085
5086@item @var{expression}
5087An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5088be used for types not defined above.
5089@end table
5090
5091You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5092in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5093@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5094Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5095output section attribute.
5096
5097The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5098which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5099explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5100an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5101header.
5102
5103Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5104headers used on a native ELF system.
5105
5106@example
5107@group
5108PHDRS
5109@{
5110 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5111 interp PT_INTERP ;
5112 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5113 data PT_LOAD ;
5114 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5115@}
5116
5117SECTIONS
5118@{
5119 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5120 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5121 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5122 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5123 @dots{}
5124 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5125 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5126 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5127 @dots{}
5128@}
5129@end group
5130@end example
5131
5132@node VERSION
5133@section VERSION Command
5134@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5135@cindex symbol versions
5136@cindex version script
5137@cindex versions of symbols
5138The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5139only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5140symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5141a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5142shared library.
5143
5144You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5145you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5146also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5147
5148The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5149@smallexample
5150VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5151@end smallexample
5152
5153The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5154Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5155version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5156version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5157version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5158scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5159library.
5160
5161The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5162examples.
5163
5164@smallexample
5165VERS_1.1 @{
5166 global:
5167 foo1;
5168 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5169 old*;
5170 original*;
5171 new*;
252b5132
RH
5172@};
5173
5174VERS_1.2 @{
5175 foo2;
5176@} VERS_1.1;
5177
5178VERS_2.0 @{
5179 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5180 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5181 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5182 "f(int, double)";
5183 @};
252b5132
RH
5184@} VERS_1.2;
5185@end smallexample
5186
5187This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5188version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5189The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5190a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5191of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5192symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5193is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5194in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5195However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5196name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5197
5198Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5199depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5200to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5201
5202Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5203depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5204and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5205
5206When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5207specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5208unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5209unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5210somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5211wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5212wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5213set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5214ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5215
5216The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5217they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5218could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5219However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5220
0f6bf451 5221Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5222in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5223symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5224won't.
5225
5226@smallexample
7c9c73be 5227@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5228@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5229
252b5132
RH
5230When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5231symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5232requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5233shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5234loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5235linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5236application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5237way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5238all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5239search for each symbol reference.
5240
5241The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5242doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5243that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5244functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5245the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5246required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5247that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5248versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5249the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5250
5251There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5252first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5253source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5254script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5255maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5256@smallexample
5257__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5258@end smallexample
5259@noindent
5260in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5261be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5262The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5263@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5264takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5265
5266The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5267function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5268an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5269version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5270linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5271
5272To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5273source file. Here is an example:
5274
5275@smallexample
5276__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5277__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5278__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5279__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5280@end smallexample
5281
5282In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5283unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5284example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5285@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5286
5287When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5288some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5289this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5290@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5291declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5292you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5293
5294If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5295within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5296(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5297specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5298
cb840a31
L
5299You can also specify the language in the version script:
5300
5301@smallexample
5302VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5303@end smallexample
5304
c0065db7 5305The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5306The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5307demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5308patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5309@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5310
86043bbb
MM
5311Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5312described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5313or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5314the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5315whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5316cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5317might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5318should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5319expect when you upgrade.
5320
252b5132
RH
5321@node Expressions
5322@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5323@cindex expressions
5324@cindex arithmetic
5325The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5326that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5327expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5328host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5329
5330You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5331
5332The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5333expressions.
5334
5335@menu
5336* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5337* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5338* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5339* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5340* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5341* Operators:: Operators
5342* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5343* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5344* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5345@end menu
5346
5347@node Constants
5348@subsection Constants
5349@cindex integer notation
5350@cindex constants in linker scripts
5351All constants are integers.
5352
5353As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5354octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5355hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5356@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5357@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5358value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5359
5360@cindex scaled integers
5361@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5362@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5363@cindex suffixes for integers
5364@cindex integer suffixes
5365In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5366constant by
5367@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5368@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5369@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5370@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5371@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5372@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5373@tex
5374${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5375@end tex
5376@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5377respectively. For example, the following
5378all refer to the same quantity:
5379
252b5132 5380@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5381_fourk_1 = 4K;
5382_fourk_2 = 4096;
5383_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5384_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5385@end smallexample
5386
8a308ae8
NC
5387Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5388conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5389
0c71d759
NC
5390@node Symbolic Constants
5391@subsection Symbolic Constants
5392@cindex symbolic constants
5393@kindex CONSTANT
5394It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5395the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5396
5397@table @code
5398@item MAXPAGESIZE
5399@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5400The target's maximum page size.
5401
5402@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5403@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5404The target's default page size.
5405@end table
5406
5407So for example:
5408
5409@smallexample
9d5777a3 5410 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5411@end smallexample
5412
5413will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5414supported by the target.
5415
252b5132
RH
5416@node Symbols
5417@subsection Symbol Names
5418@cindex symbol names
5419@cindex names
5420@cindex quoted symbol names
5421@kindex "
5422Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5423and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5424Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5425specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5426keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5427@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5428"SECTION" = 9;
5429"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5430@end smallexample
5431
5432Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5433to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5434whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5435
ecca9871
L
5436@node Orphan Sections
5437@subsection Orphan Sections
5438@cindex orphan
5439Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5440are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5441script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5442output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5443placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5444attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5445same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5446If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5447at the end of the file.
5448
5449For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5450well as section flag.
5451
41911f68 5452If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5453the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5454__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5455section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5456orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5457representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5458character.
5459
252b5132
RH
5460@node Location Counter
5461@subsection The Location Counter
5462@kindex .
5463@cindex dot
5464@cindex location counter
5465@cindex current output location
5466The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5467current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5468location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5469within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5470anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5471
5472@cindex holes
5473Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5474moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5475location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5476and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5477doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5478
5479@smallexample
5480SECTIONS
5481@{
5482 output :
5483 @{
5484 file1(.text)
5485 . = . + 1000;
5486 file2(.text)
5487 . += 1000;
5488 file3(.text)
563e308f 5489 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5490@}
5491@end smallexample
5492@noindent
5493In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5494located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5495followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5496@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5497@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5498specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5499
5c6bbab8
NC
5500@cindex dot inside sections
5501Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5502current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5503statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5504absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5505however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5506not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5507
5508@smallexample
5509SECTIONS
5510@{
5511 . = 0x100
5512 .text: @{
5513 *(.text)
5514 . = 0x200
5515 @}
5516 . = 0x500
5517 .data: @{
5518 *(.data)
5519 . += 0x600
5520 @}
5521@}
5522@end smallexample
5523
5524The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5525and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5526the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5527much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5528move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5529and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5530the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5531the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5532
b5666f2f
AM
5533@cindex dot outside sections
5534Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5535output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5536needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5537
5538@smallexample
5539SECTIONS
5540@{
5541 start_of_text = . ;
5542 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5543 end_of_text = . ;
5544
5545 start_of_data = . ;
5546 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5547 end_of_data = . ;
5548@}
5549@end smallexample
5550
5551If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5552not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5553between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5554should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5555blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5556the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5557sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5558statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5559special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5560place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5561as follows:
5562
5563@smallexample
5564SECTIONS
5565@{
5566 start_of_text = . ;
5567 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5568 end_of_text = . ;
5569
5570 start_of_data = . ;
5571 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5572 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5573 end_of_data = . ;
5574@}
5575@end smallexample
5576
5577This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5578@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5579placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5580assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5581a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5582section. So you could write:
5583
5584@smallexample
5585SECTIONS
5586@{
5587 start_of_text = . ;
5588 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5589 end_of_text = . ;
5590
5591 . = . ;
5592 start_of_data = . ;
5593 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5594 end_of_data = . ;
5595@}
5596@end smallexample
5597
5598Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5599@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5600
252b5132
RH
5601@need 2000
5602@node Operators
5603@subsection Operators
5604@cindex operators for arithmetic
5605@cindex arithmetic operators
5606@cindex precedence in expressions
5607The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5608the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5609@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5610@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5611@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5612@smallexample
5613precedence associativity Operators Notes
5614(highest)
56151 left ! - ~ (1)
56162 left * / %
56173 left + -
56184 left >> <<
56195 left == != > < <= >=
56206 left &
56217 left |
56228 left &&
56239 left ||
562410 right ? :
562511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5626(lowest)
5627@end smallexample
5628Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5629(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5630(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5631@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5632@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5633@tex
5634\vskip \baselineskip
5635%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5636\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5637\hrule
5638\halign
5639{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5640height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5641&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5642height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5643\noalign{\hrule}
5644height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5645&highest&&&&&\cr
5646% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5647&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5648&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5649&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5650&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5651&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5652&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5653&7&&left&&|&\cr
5654&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5655&9&&left&&||&\cr
5656&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5657&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5658&lowest&&&&&\cr
5659height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5660\hrule}
5661@end tex
5662@iftex
5663{
5664@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5665@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5666@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5667}
5668@end iftex
5669@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5670
5671@node Evaluation
5672@subsection Evaluation
5673@cindex lazy evaluation
5674@cindex expression evaluation order
5675The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5676an expression when absolutely necessary.
5677
5678The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5679address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5680regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5681as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5682
5683However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5684until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5685other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5686for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5687
5688The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5689assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5690allocation.
5691
5692Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5693@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5694
5695If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5696available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5697following
5698@smallexample
5699@group
5700SECTIONS
5701 @{
a1ab1d2a 5702 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5703 @{ *(.text) @}
5704 @}
5705@end group
5706@end smallexample
5707@noindent
5708will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5709address}.
5710
5711@node Expression Section
5712@subsection The Section of an Expression
5713@cindex expression sections
5714@cindex absolute expressions
5715@cindex relative expressions
5716@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5717@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5718@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5719Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5720relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5721using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5722value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5723symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5724operations.
5725
abf4be64
AM
5726Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5727section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5728address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5729@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5730functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5731One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5732(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5733differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5734versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5735section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5736Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5737absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5738given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5739everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5740
5741In the following simple example,
252b5132 5742
7542af2a
AM
5743@smallexample
5744@group
5745SECTIONS
5746 @{
5747 . = 0x100;
5748 __executable_start = 0x100;
5749 .data :
5750 @{
5751 . = 0x10;
5752 __data_start = 0x10;
5753 *(.data)
5754 @}
5755 @dots{}
5756 @}
5757@end group
5758@end smallexample
252b5132 5759
7542af2a
AM
5760both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5761address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5762@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5763section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5764
5c3049d2
AM
5765For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5766addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5767
5768@itemize @bullet
5769@item
c05f749e
AM
5770Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5771operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5772absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5773@item
7542af2a
AM
5774Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5775relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5776and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5777@item
c05f749e
AM
5778Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5779in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5780address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5781before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5782@end itemize
5783
5784The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5785
5786@itemize @bullet
5787@item
5788An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5789@item
5790The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5791@item
9bc8bb33 5792The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5793relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5794(after above conversions) is also a number.
5795@item
5796The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5797relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5798section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5799@item
5800The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5801conversions) is an absolute address.
5802@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5803
5804You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5805to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5806create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5807section @samp{.data}:
5808@smallexample
5809SECTIONS
5810 @{
5811 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5812 @}
5813@end smallexample
5814@noindent
5815If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5816@samp{.data} section.
5817
7542af2a
AM
5818Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5819particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5820
252b5132
RH
5821@node Builtin Functions
5822@subsection Builtin Functions
5823@cindex functions in expressions
5824The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5825use in linker script expressions.
5826
5827@table @code
5828@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5829@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5830@cindex expression, absolute
5831Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5832of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5833value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5834normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5835
5836@item ADDR(@var{section})
5837@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5838@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5839Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5840script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5841the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5842@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5843@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5844the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5845@smallexample
5846@group
5847SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5848 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5849 @{
252b5132
RH
5850 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5851 @dots{}
5852 @}
5853 .output :
5854 @{
5855 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5856 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5857 @}
5858@dots{} @}
5859@end group
5860@end smallexample
5861
876f4090
NS
5862@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5863@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5864@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5865@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5866@cindex round up location counter
5867@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5868@cindex round up expression
5869@cindex align expression
5870Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5871to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5872doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5873arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5874expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5875equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5876
5877Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5878next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5879variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5880input sections:
252b5132
RH
5881@smallexample
5882@group
5883SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5884 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5885 *(.data)
5886 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5887 @}
5888@dots{} @}
5889@end group
5890@end smallexample
5891@noindent
5892The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5893a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5894a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5895of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5896
5897The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5898
362c1d1a
NS
5899@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5900@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5901@cindex section alignment
5902Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5903been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5904evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5905the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5906value in that section.
5907@smallexample
5908@group
5909SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5910 .output @{
5911 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5912 @dots{}
5913 @}
5914@dots{} @}
5915@end group
5916@end smallexample
5917
252b5132
RH
5918@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5919@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5920This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5921scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5922section.
5923
2d20f7bf
JJ
5924@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5925@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5926This is equivalent to either
5927@smallexample
5928(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5929@end smallexample
5930or
5931@smallexample
5932(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5933@end smallexample
5934@noindent
5935depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5936for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5937@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5938If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5939memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5940bytes in the on-disk file.
5941
5942This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5943any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5944@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5945be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5946working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5947
5948@noindent
5949Example:
5950@smallexample
5951 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5952@end smallexample
5953
5954@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5955@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5956This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5957evaluation purposes.
5958
5959@smallexample
5960 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5961@end smallexample
5962
a4f5ad88
JJ
5963@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5964@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5965This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5966@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5967When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5968does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5969@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5970boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5971it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5972@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5973padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5974section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5975
5976@smallexample
5977 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5978@end smallexample
5979
252b5132
RH
5980@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5981@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5982@cindex symbol defaults
5983Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5984defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5985return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5986default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5987shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5988the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5989existed, its value is preserved:
5990
5991@smallexample
5992@group
5993SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5994 .text : @{
5995 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5996 @dots{}
5997 @}
5998 @dots{}
5999@}
6000@end group
6001@end smallexample
6002
3ec57632
NC
6003@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6004@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6005Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6006
252b5132
RH
6007@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6008@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6009@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6010Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6011Section LMA}).
6012
2e53f7d6
NC
6013@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6014@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6015Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6016@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6017
252b5132
RH
6018@kindex MAX
6019@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6020Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6021
6022@kindex MIN
6023@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6024Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6025
6026@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6027@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6028@cindex unallocated address, next
6029Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6030This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6031use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6032output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6033
3ec57632
NC
6034@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6035@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6036Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6037
ba916c8a
MM
6038@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6039@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6040Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6041value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6042@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6043will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6044can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6045``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6046name.
6047
252b5132
RH
6048@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6049@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6050@cindex section size
6051Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6052been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6053evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6054@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6055@smallexample
6056@group
6057SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6058 .output @{
6059 .start = . ;
6060 @dots{}
6061 .end = . ;
6062 @}
6063 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6064 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6065@dots{} @}
6066@end group
6067@end smallexample
6068
6069@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6070@itemx sizeof_headers
6071@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6072@cindex header size
6073Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6074information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6075this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6076choose, to facilitate paging.
6077
6078@cindex not enough room for program headers
6079@cindex program headers, not enough room
6080When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6081@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6082number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6083addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6084additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6085room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6086the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6087script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6088you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6089command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6090@end table
6091
6092@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6093@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6094@cindex implicit linker scripts
6095If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6096an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6097linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6098linker will report an error.
6099
6100An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6101
6102Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6103assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6104commands.
6105
6106Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6107at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6108read. This can affect archive searching.
6109
6110@ifset GENERIC
6111@node Machine Dependent
6112@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6113
6114@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6115@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6116sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6117functionality are not listed.
6118
6119@menu
36f63dca
NC
6120@ifset H8300
6121* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6122@end ifset
6123@ifset I960
6124* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6125@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6126@ifset M68HC11
6127* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6128@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6129@ifset ARM
6130* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6131@end ifset
6132@ifset HPPA
6133* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6134@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6135@ifset M68K
6136* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6137@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6138@ifset MIPS
6139* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6140@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6141@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6142* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6143@end ifset
2469cfa2 6144@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6145* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6146@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6147@ifset NDS32
6148* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6149@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6150@ifset NIOSII
6151* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6153@ifset POWERPC
6154* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6155@end ifset
6156@ifset POWERPC64
6157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6159@ifset SPU
6160* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6161@end ifset
74459f0e 6162@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6163* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6165@ifset WIN32
6166* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6168@ifset XTENSA
6169* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6171@end menu
6172@end ifset
6173
252b5132
RH
6174@ifset H8300
6175@ifclear GENERIC
6176@raisesections
6177@end ifclear
6178
6179@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6180@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6181
6182@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6183For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6184you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6185
6186@table @emph
6187@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6188@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6189@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6190targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6191program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6192respectively.
6193
6194@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6195@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6196@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6197@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6198sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6199page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6200(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6201@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6202top page of memory).
1502569c 6203
81f5558e
NC
6204@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6205indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6206displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6207the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6208@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6209whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6210range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6211
1502569c 6212@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6213@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6214biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6215which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6216page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6217(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6218@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6219the top page of memory).
6220
6221@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6222@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
622332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6224changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6225(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6226@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6227the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6228@end table
6229
6230@ifclear GENERIC
6231@lowersections
6232@end ifclear
6233@end ifset
6234
36f63dca 6235@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6236@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6237@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6238@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6239@node Renesas
6240@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6241
c2dcd04e
NC
6242@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6243H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6244options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6245@end ifset
6246@end ifclear
6247
6248@ifset I960
6249@ifclear GENERIC
6250@raisesections
6251@end ifclear
6252
6253@node i960
6254@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6255
6256@cindex i960 support
6257
6258You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6259specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6260family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6261incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6262linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6263libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6264search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6265
6266For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6267well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6268paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6269the names
6270
6271@smallexample
6272@group
6273try
6274libtry.a
6275tryca
6276libtryca.a
6277@end group
6278@end smallexample
6279
6280@noindent
6281The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6282two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6283
6284You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6285the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6286use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6287specifies a library.
6288
6289@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6290@cindex relaxing on i960
6291@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6292you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6293@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6294them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6295instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6296instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6297target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6298not itself call any subroutines).
6299
6300@ifclear GENERIC
6301@lowersections
6302@end ifclear
6303@end ifset
6304
6305@ifset ARM
6306@ifclear GENERIC
6307@raisesections
6308@end ifclear
6309
93fd0973
SC
6310@ifset M68HC11
6311@ifclear GENERIC
6312@raisesections
6313@end ifclear
6314
6315@node M68HC11/68HC12
6316@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6317
6318@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6319
6320@subsection Linker Relaxation
6321
6322For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6323optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6324
6325@table @emph
6326@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6327@item relaxing address modes
6328@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6329targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6330program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6331respectively.
6332
6333@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6334transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6335page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6336
6337@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6338When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6339of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6340addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6341@code{bset} instructions.
6342
6343@end table
6344
6345@subsection Trampoline Generation
6346
6347@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6348@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6349For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6350call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6351will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6352trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6353case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6354point to the function trampoline.
6355
6356@ifclear GENERIC
6357@lowersections
6358@end ifclear
6359@end ifset
6360
36f63dca 6361@node ARM
3674e28a 6362@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6363
6364@cindex ARM interworking support
6365@kindex --support-old-code
6366For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6367between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6368been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6369line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6370libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6371option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6372given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6373which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6374the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6375non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6376
6377@cindex thumb entry point
6378@cindex entry point, thumb
6379@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6380The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6381@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6382But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6383branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6384executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6385
ce11ba6c
KT
6386@cindex PE import table prefixing
6387@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6388The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6389the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6390element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6391import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6392
e489d0ae
PB
6393@cindex BE8
6394@kindex --be8
6395The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6396executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6397The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6398
3674e28a
PB
6399@cindex TARGET1
6400@kindex --target1-rel
6401@kindex --target1-abs
6402The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6403@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6404or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6405and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6406
6407@cindex TARGET2
6408@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6409The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6410@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6411meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6412@table @samp
6413@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6414@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6415@item abs
6416@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6417@item got-rel
6418@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6419@end table
6420
319850b4
JB
6421@cindex FIX_V4BX
6422@kindex --fix-v4bx
6423The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6424specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6425interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6426also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6427
6428In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6429linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6430@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6431
6432In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6433relocations are ignored.
6434
845b51d6
PB
6435@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6436@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6437Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6438relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6439
6440@smallexample
6441TST rM, #1
6442MOVEQ PC, rM
6443BX Rn
6444@end smallexample
6445
6446This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6447and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6448condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6449
33bfe774
JB
6450@cindex USE_BLX
6451@kindex --use-blx
6452The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6453BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6454situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6455code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6456each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6457
6458This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6459specify it if you are using that target.
6460
c6dd86c6
JB
6461@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6462@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6463The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6464bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6465instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6466to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6467the support code can read the intended values.
6468
6469The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6470intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6471and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6472intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6473full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6474you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6475
6476If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6477enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6478@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6479mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6480vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6481@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6482
6483If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6484potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6485such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6486first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6487instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6488the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6489are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6490
2de70689
MGD
6491@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6492@kindex --fix-arm1176
6493@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6494The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6495in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6496are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6497unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6498
9d5777a3 6499Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6500Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6501http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6502
bf21ed78
MS
6503@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6504@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6505The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6506warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6507enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6508linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6509using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6510not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6511
6512@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6513@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6514The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6515warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6516@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6517linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6518using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6519
726150b7
NC
6520@cindex PIC_VENEER
6521@kindex --pic-veneer
6522The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6523ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6524is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6525@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6526
6527@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6528@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6529The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6530code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6531perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6532placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6533controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6534The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6535duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6536group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6537code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6538where they should be placed.
6539
6540The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6541@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6542placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6543branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6544placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6545value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6546exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6547A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6548linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6549from the input sections.
6550
6551The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6552@samp{N = +1}.
6553
1a51c1a4
NC
6554Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6555only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6556otherwise.
6557
1db37fe6
YG
6558@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6559@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6560@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6561The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6562
6563The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6564
6565@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6566@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6567@cindex Merging exidx entries
6568The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6569
6570@kindex --long-plt
6571@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6572The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6573which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6574entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6575
36f63dca
NC
6576@ifclear GENERIC
6577@lowersections
6578@end ifclear
6579@end ifset
6580
6581@ifset HPPA
6582@ifclear GENERIC
6583@raisesections
6584@end ifclear
6585
6586@node HPPA ELF32
6587@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6588@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6589@kindex --multi-subspace
6590When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6591import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6592The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6593stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6594multiple sub-spaces.
6595
6596@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6597@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6598Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6599stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6600@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6601sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6602a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6603the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6604conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6605prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6606A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6607branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6608@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6609@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6610detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6611positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6612
6613Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6614single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6615create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6616large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6617
6618@ifclear GENERIC
6619@lowersections
6620@end ifclear
6621@end ifset
6622
7fb9f789
NC
6623@ifset M68K
6624@ifclear GENERIC
6625@raisesections
6626@end ifclear
6627
6628@node M68K
6629@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6630
6631@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6632@kindex --got=@var{type}
6633The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6634The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6635@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6636the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6637@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6638entries only at non-negative offsets.
6639@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6640entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6641support such GOTs.
6642@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6643output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6644file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6645files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6646
6647@ifclear GENERIC
6648@lowersections
6649@end ifclear
6650@end ifset
6651
833794fc
MR
6652@ifset MIPS
6653@ifclear GENERIC
6654@raisesections
6655@end ifclear
6656
6657@node MIPS
6658@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6659
6660@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6661@kindex --insn32
6662@kindex --no-insn32
6663The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6664microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6665in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6666used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6667or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6668including 16-bit ones where possible.
6669
6670@ifclear GENERIC
6671@lowersections
6672@end ifclear
6673@end ifset
6674
36f63dca
NC
6675@ifset MMIX
6676@ifclear GENERIC
6677@raisesections
6678@end ifclear
6679
6680@node MMIX
6681@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6682For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6683@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6684understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6685can translate between the two formats.
6686
6687There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6688Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6689registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6690equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6691@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6692global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6693this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6694symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6695
7a2de473
HPN
6696Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6697@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6698The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6699of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6700
6701Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6702are left out from an mmo file.
6703
6704@ifclear GENERIC
6705@lowersections
6706@end ifclear
6707@end ifset
6708
6709@ifset MSP430
6710@ifclear GENERIC
6711@raisesections
6712@end ifclear
6713
6714@node MSP430
6715@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6716For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6717will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6718just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6719
6720@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6721The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6722
6723@table @code
6724@item @samp{.vectors}
6725Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6726
6727@item @samp{.bootloader}
6728Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6729in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6730
6731@item @samp{.infomem}
6732Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6733this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6734
c0065db7 6735@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6736This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6737in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6738
6739@item @samp{.noinit}
6740Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6741
c0065db7 6742The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6743@end table
6744
6745@ifclear GENERIC
6746@lowersections
6747@end ifclear
6748@end ifset
6749
35c08157
KLC
6750@ifset NDS32
6751@ifclear GENERIC
6752@raisesections
6753@end ifclear
6754
6755@node NDS32
6756@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6757@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6758For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6759relaxes objects according to these options.
6760
6761@table @code
6762@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6763Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6764
6765@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6766Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6767
6768@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6769Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6770
6771@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6772Export the EX9 table after linking.
6773
6774@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6775Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6776
6777@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6778Update the existing EX9 table.
6779
6780@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6781Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6782
6783@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6784Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6785
6786@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6787Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6788
6789@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6790Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6791@end table
6792
6793@ifclear GENERIC
6794@lowersections
6795@end ifclear
6796@end ifset
6797
78058a5e
SL
6798@ifset NIOSII
6799@ifclear GENERIC
6800@raisesections
6801@end ifclear
6802
6803@node Nios II
6804@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6805@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6806@kindex --relax on Nios II
6807
6808Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6809transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6810which may result in @command{ld} giving
6811@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6812The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6813trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6814outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6815trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6816be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6817larger than 256MB.
6818
6819The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6820is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6821@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6822locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6823source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6824register as a temporary.
6825
6826Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6827relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6828option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6829
6830@ifclear GENERIC
6831@lowersections
6832@end ifclear
6833@end ifset
6834
2a60a7a8
AM
6835@ifset POWERPC
6836@ifclear GENERIC
6837@raisesections
6838@end ifclear
6839
6840@node PowerPC ELF32
6841@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6842@cindex PowerPC long branches
6843@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6844Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6845displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6846@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6847@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6848the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6849section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6850section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6851@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6852both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6853considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6854
6855@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6856@table @option
6857@cindex PowerPC PLT
6858@kindex --bss-plt
6859@item --bss-plt
6860Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6861generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6862the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6863writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6864@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6865PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6866compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6867BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6868
016687f8
AM
6869@kindex --secure-plt
6870@item --secure-plt
6871@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6872@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6873when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6874layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6875style BSS PLT.
6876
2a60a7a8
AM
6877@cindex PowerPC GOT
6878@kindex --sdata-got
6879@item --sdata-got
6880The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6881sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6882@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6883section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6884@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6885@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6886@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6887@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6888PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6889pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6890GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6891really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6892
6893@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6894@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6895@item --emit-stub-syms
6896This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6897symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6898
6899@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6900@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6901@item --no-tls-optimize
6902PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6903sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6904disable the optimization.
6905@end table
6906
6907@ifclear GENERIC
6908@lowersections
6909@end ifclear
6910@end ifset
6911
6912@ifset POWERPC64
6913@ifclear GENERIC
6914@raisesections
6915@end ifclear
6916
6917@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6918@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6919
6920@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6921@table @option
6922@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6923@kindex --stub-group-size
6924@item --stub-group-size
6925Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6926by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6927@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6928sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6929a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6930the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6931conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6932prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6933A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6934branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6935@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6936@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6937detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6938positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6939
6940Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6941single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6942create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6943large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6944
6945@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6946@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6947@item --emit-stub-syms
6948This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6949symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6950
6951@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6952@kindex --dotsyms
6953@kindex --no-dotsyms
6954@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6955These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6956in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6957function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6958code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6959properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6960to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6961@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6962dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6963feature.
6964
6965@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6966@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6967@item --no-tls-optimize
6968PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6969sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6970disable the optimization.
6971
6972@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6973@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6974@item --no-opd-optimize
6975PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6976corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6977the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6978Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6979
6980@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6981@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6982@item --non-overlapping-opd
6983Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6984@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6985the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6986entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6987
6988@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6989@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6990@item --no-toc-optimize
6991PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6992entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6993reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6994marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6995marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6996relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6997unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6998reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6999discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7000reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7001code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7002optimization.
7003
7004@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7005@kindex --no-multi-toc
7006@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7007If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7008@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7009where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7010entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7011total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7012grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7013TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7014calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7015help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
701664K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7017Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7018
7019@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7020@kindex --no-toc-sort
7021@item --no-toc-sort
7022By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7023happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7024placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7025with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7026referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7027@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7028results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7029off this feature.
7030
7031@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7032@kindex --plt-align
7033@kindex --no-plt-align
7034@item --plt-align
7035@itemx --no-plt-align
7036Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7037aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7038boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
7039are packed tightly.
7040
7041@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7042@kindex --plt-static-chain
7043@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7044@item --plt-static-chain
7045@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7046Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7047chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7048chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7049
7050@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7051@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7052@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7053@item --plt-thread-safe
7054@itemx --no-thread-safe
7055With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7056lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7057another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7058order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7059memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7060barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7061looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7062seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7063default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7064@end table
7065
7066@ifclear GENERIC
7067@lowersections
7068@end ifclear
7069@end ifset
7070
49fa1e15
AM
7071@ifset SPU
7072@ifclear GENERIC
7073@raisesections
7074@end ifclear
7075
7076@node SPU ELF
7077@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7078
7079@cindex SPU ELF options
7080@table @option
7081
7082@cindex SPU plugins
7083@kindex --plugin
7084@item --plugin
7085This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7086
7087@cindex SPU overlays
7088@kindex --no-overlays
7089@item --no-overlays
7090Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7091regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7092@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7093turns off all this special overlay handling.
7094
7095@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7096@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7097@item --emit-stub-syms
7098This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7099symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7100
7101@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7102@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7103@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7104This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7105function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7106on calls to non-overlay regions.
7107
7108@cindex SPU local store size
7109@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7110@item --local-store=lo:hi
7111@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7112the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7113range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7114
c0065db7 7115@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7116@kindex --stack-analysis
7117@item --stack-analysis
7118SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7119unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7120under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7121@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7122@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7123determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7124for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7125for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7126for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7127find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7128and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7129under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7130dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7131is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7132and calls will be given.
7133
c0065db7 7134@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7135@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7136@item --emit-stack-syms
7137This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7138in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7139These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7140functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7141functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7142such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7143The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7144@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7145@end table
7146
7147@ifclear GENERIC
7148@lowersections
7149@end ifclear
7150@end ifset
7151
36f63dca
NC
7152@ifset TICOFF
7153@ifclear GENERIC
7154@raisesections
7155@end ifclear
7156
7157@node TI COFF
7158@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7159@cindex TI COFF versions
7160@kindex --format=@var{version}
7161The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7162TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7163also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7164format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7165header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7166
7167@ifclear GENERIC
7168@lowersections
7169@end ifclear
7170@end ifset
7171
2ca22b03
NC
7172@ifset WIN32
7173@ifclear GENERIC
7174@raisesections
7175@end ifclear
7176
7177@node WIN32
7178@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7179
c0065db7 7180This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7181See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7182command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7183
7184@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7185@cindex import libraries
7186@item import libraries
69da35b5 7187The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7188libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7189regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7190archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7191support for creating such libraries provided with the
7192@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7193
c0065db7
RM
7194@item exporting DLL symbols
7195@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7196The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7197
7198@table @emph
7199@item using auto-export functionality
7200@cindex using auto-export functionality
7201By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7202which is controlled by the following command line options:
7203
0a5d968e
NC
7204@itemize
7205@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7206@item --exclude-symbols
7207@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7208@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7209@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7210@end itemize
7211
09e2aba4
DK
7212When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7213(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7214symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7215often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7216private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7217options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7218exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7219final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7220
7221If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7222command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7223if either of the following are true:
7224
7225@itemize
7226@item A DEF file is used.
7227@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7228@end itemize
dc8465bf 7229
c0065db7
RM
7230@item using a DEF file
7231@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7232Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7233an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7234exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7235name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7236command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7237
7238@example
7239gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7240@end example
7241
0a5d968e
NC
7242Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7243@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7244
dc8465bf
NC
7245Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7246
7247@example
4b5bd4e7 7248LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7249
7250EXPORTS
7251foo
7252bar
7253_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7254another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7255var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7256doo = foo == foo2
7257eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7258@end example
dc8465bf 7259
7fcab871 7260This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7261symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7262alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7263by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7264@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7265@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7266export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7267in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7268symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7269
6b31ad16
DS
7270The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7271name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7272the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7273
b45619c0
NC
7274When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7275library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7276@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7277executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7278
7279With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7280specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7281non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7282
7283If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7284or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7285filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7286
4b5bd4e7
DS
7287The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7288
7289@example
7290EXPORTS
7291 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7292 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7293 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7294@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7295
7296Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7297@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7298@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7299@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7300Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7301@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7302string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7303
7304The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7305
7306@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7307will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7308by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7309linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7310library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7311
7312@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7313The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7314the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7315@code{*_imp__foo}).
7316
7317@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7318well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7319read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7320variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7321the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7322extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7323application will behave unexpectedly.
7324
7325@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7326it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7327symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7328API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7329the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7330
4b5bd4e7
DS
7331See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7332other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7333
7334@cindex creating a DEF file
7335While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7336with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7337
7338@item Using decorations
7339@cindex Using decorations
7340Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7341itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7342declared as:
7343
7344@example
7345__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7346__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7347@end example
7348
7349All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7350any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7351this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7352the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7353
7354Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7355decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7356instead:
7357
7358@example
7359__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7360__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7361@end example
7362
c0065db7
RM
7363This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7364when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7365variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7366code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7367of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7368omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7369@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7370information.
c0065db7 7371@end table
dc8465bf 7372
2ca22b03
NC
7373@cindex automatic data imports
7374@item automatic data imports
7375The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7376by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7377compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7378issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7379code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7380c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7381initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7382decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7383platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7384command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7385The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7386suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7387trigger the feature's use.
7388
c0065db7 7389auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7390additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7391
c0065db7 7392"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7393documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7394
c0065db7
RM
7395The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7396occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7397One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7398below.
7399
7400@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7401For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7402object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7403offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7404field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7405in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7406without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7407The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7408references.
7409
c0065db7
RM
7410The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7411be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7412themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7413runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7414compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7415support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7416run without error on an older system.
7417
c0065db7
RM
7418@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7419enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7420
7421@cindex direct linking to a dll
7422@item direct linking to a dll
7423The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7424including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7425libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7426traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7427libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7428function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7429though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7430storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7431tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7432large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7433
c0065db7 7434Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7435@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7436of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7437perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7438select the dll instead of an import library.
7439
2ca22b03 7440
69da35b5
NC
7441For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7442to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7443
7444@example
45e948fe
NC
7445libxxx.dll.a
7446xxx.dll.a
7447libxxx.a
7448xxx.lib
69da35b5 7449cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7450libxxx.dll
7451xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7452@end example
7453
69da35b5
NC
7454before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7455
c0065db7
RM
7456(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7457where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7458@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7459file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7460@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7461
c0065db7
RM
7462Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7463@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7464was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7465various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7466could coexist on the same machine.
7467
2ca22b03
NC
7468The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7469applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7470libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7471
7472@example
7473bin/
7474 cygxxx.dll
7475lib/
7476 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7477 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7478@end example
7479
c0065db7
RM
7480Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7481done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7482
74831. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7484@example
7485gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7486@end example
2ca22b03 7487
69da35b5
NC
7488However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7489(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7490@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7491not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7492
2ca22b03
NC
74932. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7494directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7495should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7496making the app/dll.
7497
7498@example
7499ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7500@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7501
7502Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7503
7504@example
7505gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7506@end example
69da35b5
NC
7507
7508This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7509perfectly legal
7510
7511@example
7512bin/
7513 cygxxx-5.dll
7514lib/
c0065db7 7515 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7516@end example
7517
dc8465bf 7518Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7519even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7520@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7521
7522Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7523wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7524
75251. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7526work with auto-imported data.
7527
dc8465bf
NC
75282. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7529import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7530symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7531for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7532possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7533
45e948fe
NC
75343. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7535critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7536in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7537stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7538
69da35b5 7539So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7540true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7541a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7542binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7543massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7544requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7545will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7546
c0065db7 7547@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7548@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7549@item adding additional names
7550Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7551A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7552exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7553when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7554import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7555
c0065db7 7556@example
dc8465bf
NC
7557LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7558
7559EXPORTS
c0065db7 7560foo
dc8465bf 7561_foo = foo
c0065db7 7562@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7563
7564The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7565
7566Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7567source code using the "weak" attribute:
7568
c0065db7
RM
7569@example
7570void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7571void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7572@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7573
7574See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7575symbols.
7576
7577@item renaming symbols
7578Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7579kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7580@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7581DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7582created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7583
c0065db7 7584@example
dc8465bf
NC
7585LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7586
7587EXPORTS
7588_foo = foo
c0065db7 7589@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7590
7591The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7592@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7593@end table
dc8465bf 7594
0a5d968e 7595Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7596unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7597If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7598@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7599that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7600@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7601renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7602to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7603the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7604In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7605which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7606
7607@cindex weak externals
7608@item weak externals
7609The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7610weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7611defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7612are three variants of weak externals:
7613@itemize
7614@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7615called lazy externals.
7616@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7617This form is not presently implemented.
7618@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7619implemented.
7620@end itemize
7621As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7622are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7623uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7624
7625@cindex aligned common symbols
7626@item aligned common symbols
7627As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7628desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7629the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7630carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7631by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7632tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7633but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7634warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7635
2ca22b03
NC
7636@end table
7637
7638@ifclear GENERIC
7639@lowersections
7640@end ifclear
7641@end ifset
7642
e0001a05
NC
7643@ifset XTENSA
7644@ifclear GENERIC
7645@raisesections
7646@end ifclear
7647
7648@node Xtensa
7649@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7650
7651@cindex Xtensa processors
7652The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7653@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7654specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7655keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7656example, with the command:
7657
7658@smallexample
7659SECTIONS
7660@{
7661 .text : @{
7662 *(.literal .text)
7663 @}
7664@}
7665@end smallexample
7666
7667@noindent
7668@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7669and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7670literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7671interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7672group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7673files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7674and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7675
43cd72b9 7676@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7677@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7678Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7679provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7680is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7681literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7682will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7683location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7684the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7685unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7686@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7687range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7688
7689For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7690to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7691instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7692instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7693instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7694@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7695hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7696By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7697switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7698density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7699instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7700performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7701linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7702a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7703
7704The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7705control the linker:
7706
7707@cindex Xtensa options
7708@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7709@item --size-opt
7710When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7711more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7712no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7713alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7714preserve the correctness of the code.
7715@end table
e0001a05
NC
7716
7717@ifclear GENERIC
7718@lowersections
7719@end ifclear
7720@end ifset
7721
252b5132
RH
7722@ifclear SingleFormat
7723@node BFD
7724@chapter BFD
7725
7726@cindex back end
7727@cindex object file management
7728@cindex object formats available
7729@kindex objdump -i
7730The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7731These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7732object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7733format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7734it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7735associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7736object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7737(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7738list all the formats available for your configuration.
7739
7740@cindex BFD requirements
7741@cindex requirements for BFD
7742As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7743several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7744BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7745formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7746been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7747BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7748may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7749
7750One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7751mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7752useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7753conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7754
7755@menu
7756* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7757@end menu
7758
7759@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7760@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7761@cindex opening object files
7762@include bfdsumm.texi
7763@end ifclear
7764
7765@node Reporting Bugs
7766@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7767@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7768@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7769
ff5dcc92 7770Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7771
7772Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7773it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7774to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7775work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7776@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7777
7778In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7779information that enables us to fix the bug.
7780
7781@menu
7782* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7783* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7784@end menu
7785
7786@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7787@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7788@cindex bug criteria
7789
7790If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7791
7792@itemize @bullet
7793@cindex fatal signal
7794@cindex linker crash
7795@cindex crash of linker
7796@item
7797If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7798@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7799
7800@cindex error on valid input
7801@item
ff5dcc92 7802If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7803
7804@cindex invalid input
7805@item
ff5dcc92 7806If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7807may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7808object files are correct.
7809
7810@item
7811If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7812improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7813@end itemize
7814
7815@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7816@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7817@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7818@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7819
7820A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7821products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7822recommend you contact that organization first.
7823
7824You can find contact information for many support companies and
7825individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7826distribution.
7827
ad22bfe8 7828@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7829Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7830@value{BUGURL}.
7831@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7832
7833The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7834@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7835fact or leave it out, state it!
7836
7837Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7838problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7839assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7840matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7841the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7842location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7843were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7844into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7845specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7846and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7847
7848Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7849the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7850on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7851
7852Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7853bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7854respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7855You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7856
7857To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7858
7859@itemize @bullet
7860@item
ff5dcc92 7861The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7862the @samp{--version} argument.
7863
7864Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7865the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7866
7867@item
ff5dcc92 7868Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7869patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7870
7871@item
7872The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7873version number.
7874
7875@item
ff5dcc92 7876What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7877``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7878
7879@item
7880The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7881observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7882list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7883sufficient.
7884
7885If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7886and then we might not encounter the bug.
7887
7888@item
7889A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7890bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7891provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7892bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7893state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7894requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7895we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7896attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7897
7898If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7899@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7900object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7901@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7902how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7903
7904@item
7905A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7906incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7907
ff5dcc92 7908Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7909will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7910not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7911a chance to make a mistake.
7912
7913Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7914say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7915copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7916C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7917and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7918fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7919you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7920any conclusion from our observations.
7921
7922@item
ff5dcc92 7923If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7924diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7925@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7926If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7927context, not by line number.
7928
7929The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7930sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7931@end itemize
7932
7933Here are some things that are not necessary:
7934
7935@itemize @bullet
7936@item
7937A description of the envelope of the bug.
7938
7939Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7940which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7941changes will not affect it.
7942
7943This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7944will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7945with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7946We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7947
7948Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7949of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7950output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7951less time, and so on.
7952
7953However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7954report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7955
7956@item
7957A patch for the bug.
7958
7959A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7960the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7961a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7962to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7963
ff5dcc92 7964Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7965construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7966through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7967able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7968fixed.
7969
7970And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7971patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7972help us to understand.
7973
7974@item
7975A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7976
7977Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7978things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7979@end itemize
7980
7981@node MRI
7982@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7983@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7984To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7985linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7986alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7987described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7988simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7989@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7990linker commands; these commands are described here.
7991
7992In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7993file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7994features to make use of them.
7995
7996You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7997@samp{-c} command-line option.
7998
7999Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8000command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8001blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8002MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8003issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8004
8005Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8006
8007You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8008lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8009The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8010
8011@table @code
8012@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8013@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8014@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8015Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8016the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8017@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8018your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8019script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8020commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8021input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8022@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8023
8024@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8025@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8026Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8027in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8028
8029@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8030
8031@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8032@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8033Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8034@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8035
8036@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8037@item BASE @var{expression}
8038Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8039absolute addresses) in the output file.
8040
8041@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8042@item CHIP @var{expression}
8043@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8044This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8045
8046@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8047@item END
8048This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8049
8050@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8051@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8052Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8053language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8054
8055@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8056@item
252b5132
RH
8057S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8058
8059@item
8060IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8061
8062@item
8063COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8064@samp{COFF}
8065@end enumerate
8066
8067@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8068@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8069Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8070@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8071
8072The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8073same line, with no change in its effect.
8074
8075@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8076@item LOAD @var{filename}
8077@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8078Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8079same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8080command line.
8081
8082@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8083@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8084@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8085MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8086option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8087
8088@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8089@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8090@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8091Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8092order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8093script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8094sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8095file, in the order specified.
8096
8097@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8098@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8099@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8100@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8101Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8102@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8103
8104@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8105@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8106@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8107@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8108You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8109specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8110If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8111@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8112@end table
8113
793c5807
NC
8114@node GNU Free Documentation License
8115@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8116@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8117
370b66a1
CD
8118@node LD Index
8119@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8120
8121@printindex cp
8122
8123@tex
7ca01ed9 8124% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8125% meantime:
8126\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8127\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8128\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8129\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8130\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8131\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8132\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8133\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8134\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8135% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8136@end tex
8137
252b5132 8138@bye
This page took 2.034766 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.